Series: User's Manual

YAMAHA SINGLE-AXIS ROBOT DRIVER
RD series
User’s Manual ENGLISH
E
YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

IM Operations
882 Soude, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka 435-0054.Japan
URL http://www.yamaha-motor.jp/robot/index.html E97-Ver. 2.04
Note to the user
Our sincere thanks for purchasing this "YAMAHA single-axis robot driver RD series".
This user's manual describes handling and maintenance of the RD series. Read this
manual thoroughly before using the RD series. Keep this manual handy so that the
operator or maintenance personnel can easily refer to it when needed.
Before starting installation, operation, maintenance or inspection, read this manual
carefully to understand RD series functions and comply with its safety information,
precautions, and operating and handling instructions.
Always use the RD series within the operation range specified in this manual.
Perform correct inspection and maintenance to prevent possible problems.
When using optional products for this robot driver also be sure to carefully read their
instruction manuals.
Please make sure this user's manual and option product manuals are delivered to the end
user.
About this manual

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• Carefully keep this manual because it will not be reissued.
• This manual must not be reproduced or reprinted in part or in whole without our
permission.
• Every effort was made to ensure that this manual is accurate and complete.
However, please contact us if you notice any errors, omissions or dubious points.
Please note that we accept no responsibility for any results that might occur from use
of this manual or the unit described in it.
MEMO
General Contents
Chapter 1 Safety precautions

1.1 Precautions for use 1-1
1.2 Storage 1-2
1.3 Carrying 1-3
1.4 Installation 1-3
1.5 Wiring 1-4
1.6 Control and operation 1-5
1.7 Maintenance and inspection 1-6
Chapter 2 Before using the unit

2.1 Inspection after unpacking 2-1
2.1.1 Checking the product 2-1
2.1.2 User's manual 2-2
2.2 Product inquiries and warranty 2-3
2.2.1 Notes when making an inquiry 2-3
2.2.2 Warranty 2-3
2.3 External view and part names 2-4
2.4 Robot driver and robot combination 2-5
Chapter 3 Installation and wiring

3.1.1 Precautions during installation 3-2
3.2 Wiring 3-4
3.2.1 Terminal block and connectors 3-4
3.2.2 Main circuit wiring 3-5
3.2.3 Wiring to the control terminal block (TM2) 3-13
3.2.4 Input/output signal wiring 3-14
3.2.5 Wiring for position sensor signals 3-27
Chapter 4 Operation
4.1.1 Position control by pulse train input 4-2
4.2 Test Run 4-3
4.2.1 Jog from the digital operator 4-3
4.2.2 Making a test run using "TOP" software for RD series 4-4
4.3 Emergency stop 4-6
Chapter 5 Functions
5.1 Terminal function list 5-1
5.2 Input terminal functions 5-3
5.3 Output terminal functions 5-6
5.4 Return-to-origin function 5-9
5.5 Analog output function 5-20
5.6 Pulse train input function 5-21
5.7 Smoothing function 5-24
5.8 Position sensor monitor function 5-25
5.9 Adjusting the control gain 5-26
5.9.1 Basic rules of gain adjustment 5-26
5.9.2 Setting the mechanical rigidity and response 5-27
5.9.3 Adjusting the position control loop 5-28
5.10 Offline auto-tuning function 5-29
5.10.1 Offline auto-tuning method 5-29
5.10.2 Offline auto-tuning using the TOP software 5-32
5.11 Gain change function 5-34
5.11.1 Changing the control gain 5-34
5.12 Clearing the alarm log and setting the default values 5-37
5.13 Motor rotating direction 5-39
5.13.1 FLIP-X series phase sequence 5-39
5.13.2 PHASER series phase sequence 5-39
5.14 Speed limit function 5-40
5.15 Fast positioning function 5-41
5.16 Notch filter function 5-42
5.17 Magnetic pole position estimation action 5-43
5.18 Magnetic pole position estimation and parameters 5-44
Chapter 6 Parameter description

6.1 Digital operator part names and operation 6-1
6.1.1 Part names of digital operator 6-1
6.1.2 Operating the digital operator 6-2
6.2 Function lists 6-5
6.2.1 List of monitor functions 6-6
6.2.2 List of setup parameters 6-7
6.3 Function description 6-12
6.3.1 Monitor display description 6-12
6.3.2 Setup parameter description 6-15
6.3.3 Reference graph for setting the acceleration and position
control cut-off frequency 6-32
■ RDX …………………………………………………………………………… 6-33
T4H-2 (C4H-2) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-33
T4H-2-BK (C4H-2-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-33
T4H-6 (C4H-6) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-34
T4H-6-BK (C4H-6-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-34
T4H-12 (C4H-12)…………………………………………………………………… 6-35
T4H-12-BK (C4H-12-BK)…………………………………………………………… 6-35
T5H-6 (C5H-6) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-36
T5H-6-BK (C5H-6-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-36
T5H-12 (C5H-12)…………………………………………………………………… 6-37
T5H-12-BK (C5H-12-BK)…………………………………………………………… 6-37
T5H-20 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-38
T6-6 (C6-6) ………………………………………………………………………… 6-38
T6-6-BK (C6-6-BK) ………………………………………………………………… 6-39
T6-12 (C6-12) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-39
T6-12-BK (C6-12-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-40
T6-20 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-40
T7-12 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-41
T7-12-BK …………………………………………………………………………… 6-41
T9-5 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-42
T9-5-BK ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-42
T9-10 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-43
T9-10-BK …………………………………………………………………………… 6-43
T9-20 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-44
T9-20-BK …………………………………………………………………………… 6-44
T9-30 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-45
T9H-5 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-45
T9H-5-BK …………………………………………………………………………… 6-46
T9H-10 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-46
T9H-10-BK…………………………………………………………………………… 6-47
T9H-20 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-47
T9H-20-BK…………………………………………………………………………… 6-48
T9H-30 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-48
F8-6 (C8-6) ………………………………………………………………………… 6-49
F8-6-BK (C8-6-BK) ………………………………………………………………… 6-49
F8-12 (C8-12) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-50
F8-12-BK (C8-12-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-50
F8-20 (C8-20) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-51
F8L-5 (C8L-5) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-51
F8L-5-BK (C8L-5-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-52
F8L-10 (C8L-10) …………………………………………………………………… 6-52
F8L-10-BK (C8L-10-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-53
F8L-20 (C8L-20) …………………………………………………………………… 6-53
F8L-20-BK (C8L-20-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-54
F8L-30 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-54
F8LH-5 (C8LH-5) …………………………………………………………………… 6-55
F8LH-10 (C8LH-10) ………………………………………………………………… 6-55
F8LH-20 (C8LH-20) ………………………………………………………………… 6-56
F10-5 (C10-5) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-56
F10-5-BK (C10-5-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-57
F10-10 (C10-10) …………………………………………………………………… 6-57
F10-10-BK (C10-10-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-58
F10-20 (C10-20) …………………………………………………………………… 6-58
F10-20-BK (C10-20-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-59
F10-30 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-59
F14-5 (C14-5) ……………………………………………………………………… 6-60
F14-5-BK (C14-5-BK) ……………………………………………………………… 6-60
F14-10 (C14-10) …………………………………………………………………… 6-61
F14-10-BK (C14-10-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-61
F14-20 (C14-20) …………………………………………………………………… 6-62
F14-20-BK (C14-20-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-62
F14-30 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-63
F14H-5 (C14H-5) ………………………………………………………………… 6-63
F14H-5-BK (C14H-5-BK) ………………………………………………………… 6-64
F14H-10 (C14H-10) ……………………………………………………………… 6-64
F14H-10-BK (C14H-10-BK) ……………………………………………………… 6-65
F14H-20 (C14H-20) ……………………………………………………………… 6-65
F14H-20-BK (C14H-20-BK) ……………………………………………………… 6-66
F14H-30 …………………………………………………………………………… 6-66
F17L-50 (C17L-50) ………………………………………………………………… 6-67
F17L-50-BK (C17L-50-BK) ………………………………………………………… 6-67
F17-10 (C17-10) …………………………………………………………………… 6-68
F17-10-BK (C17-10-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-68
F17-20 (C17-20) …………………………………………………………………… 6-69
F17-20-BK (C17-20-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-69
F17-40 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-70
F20-10-BK (C20-10-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-70
F20-20 (C20-20) …………………………………………………………………… 6-71
F20-20-BK (C20-20-BK) …………………………………………………………… 6-71
F20-40 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-72
F20N-20 …………………………………………………………………………… 6-72
N15-10 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-73
N15-20 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-73
N15-30 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-74
N18-20 ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-74
B10 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-75
B14 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-75
B14H ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-76
R5 …………………………………………………………………………………… 6-76
R10 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-77
R20 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-77
■ RDP …………………………………………………………………………… 6-78
MR12………………………………………………………………………………… 6-78
MR16………………………………………………………………………………… 6-78
MR16H ……………………………………………………………………………… 6-79
MR20………………………………………………………………………………… 6-79
MR25………………………………………………………………………………… 6-80
MF7 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-80
MF15 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-81
MF20 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-81
MF30 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-82
MF50 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-82
MF75 ………………………………………………………………………………… 6-83
6.4 Control block diagram and monitors 6-84
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

7.1.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection 7-2
7.1.2 Daily inspection 7-2
7.1.3 Cleaning 7-2
7.1.4 Periodic inspection 7-2
7.2 Daily inspection and periodic inspection 7-3
7.3 Megger test and breakdown voltage test 7-4
7.4 Checking the inverter and converter 7-4
7.5 Capacitor life curve 7-6
Chapter 8 Specifications and Dimensions

8.1 Specification tables 8-1
8.1.1 RDP specification table 8-1
8.1.2 RDX specification table 8-2
8.2 Robot driver dimensions and mounting holes 8-3
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Alarm display (alarm log) 9-1
9.2 Protective function list 9-2
9.3 Troubleshooting 9-3
9.3.1 When an alarm or error has not tripped 9-3
9.3.2 When an alarm or error has tripped 9-5
Chapter 10 Appendix
10.1 Options 10-1
10.2 Recommended peripheral devices 10-5
10.3 Internal block diagram of robot driver 10-11
Chapter 1 Safety precautions
To use this unit correctly and safely, always read this manual and all other attached documents
carefully before use. Use this unit only after you are thoroughly familiar with its features and
functions, safety information and precautions.
Contents
1.1 Precautions for use 1-1

1.2 Storage 1-2
1.3 Carrying 1-3
1.5 Wiring 1-4
1. Safety precautions
To use this unit correctly and safely, always read this manual and all other attached
documents carefully before use. Use this unit only after you are thoroughly familiar with
its features and functions, safety information and precautions.
This manual classifies safety caution items into the following alert levels, using the signal
1
words "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Safety precautions
w DANGER
INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED,
WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
c CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to the equipment or software.
Note that some items described with "CAUTION" might lead to serious results depending
on the situation. In any case, always observe the above instructions and precautions
since they provide important safety information.
After reading this manual, always store it where the operator can easily refer to it any
time when needed.
Symbols used to indicate a prohibited or mandatory action are explained below.

: Indicates a prohibited action. For example, indicates "Open flames prohibited
: Indicates a mandatory action. For example, indicates "Must be electrically

grounded.
1.1 Precautions for use
w DANGER
IMPROPER HANDLING MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE. ALWAYS OBSERVE
THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS.
1. NEVER TOUCH ANY PART INSIDE THE ROBOT DRIVER.
TOUCHING PARTS MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE.
2. ALWAYS GROUND THE GROUND TERMINAL ON THE ROBOT DRIVER AND
ROBOT.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
3. BEFORE MAKING WIRING CONNECTIONS OR INSPECTION, WAIT AT LEAST 10
MINUTES AFTER TURNING POWER OFF AND MAKE SURE THE CHARGE LAMP ON
THE FRONT PANEL IS OFF.
4. DO NOT DAMAGE THE CABLES OR APPLY EXCESSIVE STRESS TO THEM. DO NOT
PLACE HEAVY OBJECTS ON THE CABLES OR CRUSH THEM.
USING A DAMAGED CABLE MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
5. NEVER TOUCH A MOVING PART OF THE ROBOT DURING OPERATION.
DOING SO MAY CAUSE INJURY.
1-1
c CAUTION
1. Use only the specified robot and controller combination.
Using the wrong combination may cause fire or malfunction.
1 2. Never use this unit in locations subject to water, grinding fluid mist, corrosive
gases, explosive gases or salt damage. Do not use near inflammable
Safety precautions
objects or materials.
Doing so may cause fire, malfunction or accidents.
3. The robot driver, robot and peripheral equipment may become hot during
operation. Be careful not to touch them.
Touching them may cause burns.
4. The robot driver's heat-sink fins, regenerative resistor, and robot may
become hot when power is being supplied or shortly after power is turned
off, so do not touch them.
Touching them may cause burns.
5. Allow at least a 5-minute time interval between power on and off.
Failure to do so may cause fire.
6. Install a leakage breaker on the power supply side of the robot driver.
7. Use a power line, leakage breakers and electromagnetic contacts that
meet the required specifications (ratings).
8. Do not start/stop operation by turning on or off the electromagnetic contact
installed on the power supply side of the robot driver.
Doing so may cause fire.
1.2 Storage
PROHIBITED
DO NOT STORE THE UNIT IN LOCATIONS EXPOSED TO RAIN, WATER DROPLETS,
GRINDING FLUID MIST OR HARMFUL GASES OR LIQUIDS.
MANDATORY
1. STORE THE UNIT IN LOCATIONS NOT EXPOSED TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT AND
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE RANGE (–10 TO +70°C,
20 TO 90% RH WITHOUT CONDENSATION).
2. CONSULT WITH OUR COMPANY IF YOU HAVE STORED THE UNIT OVER AN
EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME.
1-2
1.3 Carr ying
c CAUTION
1. Do not carry the robot driver by the cables.
1
Doing so may cause malfunction or injury.
Safety precautions
2. Do not carry the unit by the top cover or by the main circuit terminal block
cover.
Doing so may cause the unit to fall resulting in injury.
MANDATORY
LOAD THE UNITS CORRECTLY AS INDICATED. STACKING TOO MANY UNITS MAY
CAUSE THEM TO FALL OVER.
1.4 Installation
c CAUTION
1. Do not step or stand on the unit. Do not place heavy objects on the unit.
Doing so may cause injury.
2. Do not block the air intake and exhaust vents. Do not allow foreign matter
or debris to penetrate inside.
3. Always use the correct method to install the unit.
The unit may malfunction if not properly installed.
4. Install the robot driver on a straight, vertical wall not subject to vibration.
The unit may fall and injure someone if not properly installed.
5. Install the unit on a surface made of incombustible materials such as metal.
6. Install the unit at a place strong enough to support the weight of the unit.
7. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Make sure that all screws are
securely fastened before operation.
8. Provide the specified clearance between the robot driver and the inner
surface of the control panel or any other unit.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
9. Do not allow foreign matter such as cut wire fragments, welding debris, iron
waste or similar items to penetrate inside.
10. Avoid applying strong shock to the unit to prevent malfunction.
11. Do not install the unit if any part is damaged or missing.
Doing so may cause fire or injury.
1-3
1.5 Wiring
1 w DANGER
1. WIRING WORK SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED ELECTRICIANS.
IMPROPER WIRING MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE.
Safety precautions
2. ALWAYS FIRST INSTALL THE UNIT BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.

FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR INJURY.
3. MAKE SURE THE POWER IS OFF BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE.
4. BE SURE TO CONNECT THE ROBOT DRIVER'S GROUND TERMINAL TO THE
GROUNDING POINT (CLASS D: 100 OHMS OR LESS).
c CAUTION
1. Make sure that wiring connections are correct.
Wrong connections may cause abnormal robot motion resulting in injury.
2. Cables connecting to the robot driver should be securely fastened near the
robot driver so that no tensile stress is applied to the cables.
Stress on the cables may lead to malfunction.
1-4
1.6 Control and operation
c CAUTION
1. To prevent unstable or erratic operation never make drastic adjustments to
1
the unit. Doing so may cause injury.
Safety precautions
2. Install a safety circuit that actuates an electromagnetic contactor to cut off
the main circuit power supply in case of an alarm.
If an alarm has occurred, eliminate the cause of the alarm and ensure
safety. Then reset the alarm and restart the operation.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
3. If a momentary power outage occurs and power is restored, the unit might
suddenly restart so do not approach the machine at that time. (Design the
machine so that personal safety is ensured even if it suddenly restarts.)
4. Make sure that the AC power specifications match the product power
specifications.
Using the wrong power specifications may cause injury.
5. While power is being supplied, do not touch any parts inside the robot driver
or its terminals.
Also, do not check the signals or attach/detach the cables.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or injury.
6. While power is being supplied, do not touch any terminals on the robot
driver even if the robot is stopped.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or fire.
7. When moving the robot for debugging the user program, configure a
control circuit that turns off the servo ON terminal in cases where an
emergency stop is required.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage the machine.
MANDATORY
INSTALL AN EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP CIRCUIT SO THAT YOU CAN
IMMEDIATELY STOP OPERATION AND SHUT OFF POWER WHENEVER NEEDED.
1-5
1.7 Maintenance and inspection
1 w DANGER
AFTER TURNING POWER OFF, WAIT AT LEAST 10 MINUTES BEFORE STARTING
MAINTENANCE AND MAKE SURE THE CHARGE LAMP ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR
Safety precautions
PANEL IS OFF.
c CAUTION
The capacitance of the capacitor on the power supply line drops due to
deterioration. Replacing the capacitor based on its service life curve is
recommended in order to prevent secondary damage resulting from capacitor
failure. (See Chapter 7, "Maintenance and inspection", of this manual.)
Using a deteriorated or defective capacitor may cause malfunction.
PROHIBITED
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISASSEMBLE OR REPAIR THE UNIT OR REPLACE ANY PARTS
OF THE UNIT. ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ARE ALLOWED TO DO REPAIR
WORK.
1-6
Chapter 2 Before using the unit
This chapter explains what you need to check after receiving the product you purchased as well as
the warranty and the product part names.
Contents
2.1 Inspection after unpacking 2-1

2.1.1 Checking the product 2-1
2.1.2 User's manual 2-2
2.2 Product inquiries and warranty 2-3
2.2.1 Notes when making an inquiry 2-3
2.2.2 Warranty 2-3
2.3 External view and part names 2-4
2.4 Robot driver and robot combination 2-5
2. Before using the unit
2.1 Inspection after unpacking
2.1.1 Checking the product

After unpacking, take out the robot driver and check the following items.
If you find or suspect any damage to the product please contact our sales office or sales
representative.
2
Before using the unit

(1) Make sure that there is no damage, missing parts or dents/scratches on the product
body.
(2) After unpacking, make sure that the package contains the following items.
Item Qty Note
1) Robot driver 1
Supplied with a wire inserter tool and
2) Control power supply connector 1
B1-B2 shorting bar.
3) Connector plug 1 For detailed information, refer to 3.2.4,
4) Connector cover non-shielded shell kit 1 "Input/output signal wiring", in Chapter 3.
(3) Check the specification label to find whether the product is the same item as ordered.
1) 2)
Serial number label
X
RD
Specification label
Specification label position
Robot driver model name

Maximum output for
applicable motor
Input rating
Output rating
NE
882 Soude, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Shizuoka 435-0054, Japan
Details on specification label
2-1
X05 – 05 X 0001
Production number
Production month
2 Robot driver model No.

1 to 9 January to September
O
X
October
November
X05 RDX-05 Y December

X10 RDX-10
X20 RDX-20
P05 RDP-05 Production year: Last 2 digits of year
P10 RDP-10
P20 RDP-20
P25 RDP-25
Details on serial number label
2.1.2 User's manual

This user's manual describes how to use the YAMAHA single-axis robot driver RD series.
Before using the RD series, read this manual thoroughly in order to handle and operate it
correctly. Store this manual carefully even after reading it.
2-2
2.2 Product inquiries and warranty
2.2.1 Notes when making an inquir y

If you need to inquire about possible product damage, failures or points that are unclear,
then please contact us with the following information.
2

(1) Robot driver model
(2) Production number
(3) Date of purchase
(4) Details of your inquiry
• Damaged section and condition, etc.
• Dubious point and description, etc.
2.2.2 Warranty
For information on the product warranty, please contact your local agent where you
purchased your product.
2-3
2.3 External view and part names

Battery housing cover
Battery holder
2 Not used.
Charge lamp
Lights up when the main
power supply is turned on.
This lamp remains lit as
long as the main circuit
capacitor retains a charge
after the power supply is
turned off.
Do not touch the robot
driver while the lamp is lit.
Main circuit terminal block (TM1)
Terminals for connecting to the main Display panel
circuit power supply, external This is a 5-digit 7-segment LED
regenerative resistor, and motor display used as the operation monitor,
power cable. parameter display and trip (alarm) display.
A cover is fitted to this terminal Exhaust air
block when purchased.
Digital operator
Use these operator keys
X
RD to set parameters.
Computer connector (PC)
Connects to a PC (personal
computer) for data transfer.
Input/output
signal connector (I/O)
Connector for command
input signals,
programmable controller
input signals, and origin
sensor signals.
Position sensor
connector (ENC)
Connects to the linear
motor position sensor
or resolver.
Control power supply
connector (TM2)
Connects to the control
Ground terminal
power supply.
Always ground the
unit through this terminal B1-B2 shorting bar
to prevent electrical shock. Always connect this
shorting bar when using an
Intake air internal braking resistor
(Natural air convection) (RD*-20 and RDP-25).
(RD*-05 and RD*-10 have
no internal braking resistor.)
2-4
2.4 Robot driver and robot combination

The table below shows applicable combinations of robot drivers and robots.
Robot driver name Model No. Applicable robots
RDP
RDP-05
RDP-10
MR12, MR16
MR16H, MR25, MF7
2

(For PHASER series) RDP-20 MR20, MF15, MF20, MF30, MF50
RDP-25 MF75
T4H, T5H, T6, T7, T9, F8, F8L, F8LH, F10, F14, B10, B14,
RDX-05
R5, R10, C4H, C5H, C6, C8, C8L, C8LH, C10, C14
RDX
(For FLIP-X series) RDX-10 T9H, F14H, B14H, R20, C14H
RDX-20 F17, F17L, F20, F20N, N15, N18, C17, C17L, C20
Note: Parameters are adjusted at the factory prior to shipping so that the robot driver operates
to control the target robot. Please contact us if you want to change the target robot model
after shipping.
2-5
MEMO
2-6
Chapter 3 Installation and wiring
This chapter explains how to install the robot driver, as well as how to connect wiring to the main
circuit and input/output signals. Typical connection examples are shown.
Contents

3.1.1 Precautions during installation 3-2
3.2 Wiring 3-4
3.2.1 Terminal block and connectors 3-4
3.2.2 Main circuit wiring 3-5
3.2.3 Wiring to the control terminal block (TM2) 3-13
3.2.4 Input/output signal wiring 3-14
3.2.5 Wiring for position sensor signals 3-27
3. Installation and wiring
3.1 Installation
c CAUTION
1. Do not step or stand on the unit. Do not place heavy objects on the unit.
Doing so may cause injury.
2. Do not block the air intake and exhaust vents. Do not allow foreign matter
or debris to penetrate inside.
3. Always use the correct method to install the unit. 3
The unit may malfunction if not properly installed.
Installation and wiring

4. Install the robot driver on a perpendicular wall not subject to vibration.
5. Install the unit on a surface made of incombustible materials such as metal.
6. Install the unit at a place strong enough to support the weight of the unit.
7. Tighten the screws to the specified torque. Make sure that all screws are
securely fastened before operation.
Screw size Tightening torque (N•m) Note
M3 0.6 to 0.9
M4 1.5 to 2.1
Mounting screws for robot
M5 2.8 to 3.9
driver and peripheral devices
M6 4.1 to 5.3
M8 13.9 to 20.0
8. Provide the specified clearance between the robot driver and the inner
surface of the control panel or any other unit.
Failure to do so may cause malfunction.
9. Do not allow foreign matter such as cut wire fragments, welding debris, iron
waste or similar items to penetrate inside.
10. Avoid applying strong shock to the unit to prevent malfunction.
11. Do not install the unit if any part is damaged or missing.
Doing so may cause fire or injury.
3-1
3.1.1 Precautions during installation

(1) Precautions when carr ying the unit
The robot driver uses plastic parts. Handle it carefully to avoid damage to the plastic
parts.
Take special care not to carry the unit in such a way that force is applied only to the
front cover or terminal block cover. Otherwise you might drop the unit.
Do not install and operate the unit if any part is damaged or missing.
3 (2) Install the unit on an incombustible (metal) surface.
The robot driver becomes hot during operation. To prevent fire always install it on an
incombustible, straight vertical metal wall.
Also provide enough space around the unit. If there is any heat generating device
(braking resistor, electric reactor, etc.), keep the unit a sufficient distance away from
it.
Air flow Provide enough space so that upper/lower

wiring ducts will not block cooling air flow.
Robot driver
Wall
(3) Ambient temperature precautions

The ambient temperature in the installation place should not exceed the allowable
operating temperature range (0 to 40˚C) specified in the standard specifications.
Measure the ambient temperature at a position about 50mm away from the lower
center of the robot driver body, and make sure that it is within the allowable operating
temperature range.
Operating the robot driver at a temperature exceeding the allowable range may
shorten its service life (especially, capacitor life) or damage the internal components.
(4) Do not install the unit in locations subject to high temperatures and high humidity
where condensation tends to occur.
Always operate the robot driver within the allowable operating humidity range (20 to
90% RH) specified in the standard specifications. In particular, operate it in locations
free from condensation.
If water droplets formed inside the robot driver due to condensation, this might cause
short-circuits between electronic components that result in malfunction.
Avoid installing the unit in locations exposed to direct sunlight.
(5) Installation environment precautions

Avoid installing the unit in locations subject to dust, corrosive gases, explosive gases,
combustible gases, grinding lubricant mist or salt damage. Dust or debris penetrating
the unit may cause malfunction.
If the unit must be used in very dusty place, house it in a sealed dust-proof box.
3-2
(6) Installation method and direction precautions

Install the robot driver on a vertical surface capable of supporting the weight. Secure
the robot driver firmly by screws or bolts.
If the robot driver is not installed vertically on the wall surface, the cooling capacity
may degrade causing a trip or alarm and/or damaging the internal components.
For mounting hole locations, refer to 8.2, "Robot driver dimensions and mounting
holes".
(7) Precautions when housing robot drivers in a box

When housing multiple robot drivers in a box and using ventilation fans, attach the
3

fans as shown below in order to ensure a uniform temperature around each robot
driver.
Wiring space of
100mm or more 75mm or more
Fan Fan
Robot
driver
100mm or more 40mm or 10mm or 10mm or 10mm or 40mm or

more more more more more
Install the robot drivers 40mm or more away from the inner side walls of the box and
100mm or more away from the inner top/bottom walls of the box. Allow a clearance
of 10mm or more between adjacent robot drivers.
3-3
3.2 Wiring
w DANGER
1. WIRING WORK SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED ELECTRICIANS.
IMPROPER WIRING MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE.
2. ALWAYS FIRST INSTALL THE UNIT BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR INJURY.
3 3. MAKE SURE THE POWER IS OFF BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.

c CAUTION
1. Make sure that wiring connections are correct.
Wrong connections may cause abnormal robot motion resulting in injury.
2. Cables connecting to the robot driver should be securely fastened near the
robot driver so that no tensile stress is applied to the cables.
Stress on the cables may lead to malfunction.
3.2.1 Terminal block and connectors

The terminal block and connectors on the robot driver are shown below.
RDX
FUNC
CHARGE SET
Main circuit terminal block

(TM1) Computer connector (PC)
Input/output signal connector (I/O)
Position sensor connector (ENC)
Ground terminal
Control power supply connector (TM2)
3-4
3.2.2 Main circuit wiring

(1) Terminal connection diagram
TM1 TM1
Shorting bar
(+)1 U
(DC reactor connecting terminal)
(+) V
Regenerative braking resistor

3
Robot driver W
(option) RB
(-)
Power supply

L1
3-phase 200 to 230 V AC Note 1)
L2
L3
MG
ELB
ENC
TM2
L1C
L2C
When using external regenerative B1 PC
braking resistor, disconnect B1-B2 shorting bar. B2
I/O PC for parameter setting

Master and operation monitoring
controller
Origin sensor
Note 1: Regenerative braking resistor is built in RD*-20 and RDP-25 robot drivers.
(Not built into RD*-05 and RD*-10 robot drivers.)
3-5
(2) Terminal assignment

Terminal Terminal
Terminal
block Terminal assignment screw
width (mm)
connector size
Shorting (+)1 DC reactor connection terminal
bar (Short these terminals when not used.)
(+)
RB
External braking resistor connection terminal
Main DC power input terminal
circuit (–)
3 terminal
block
(TM1)
L1
L2
L3
Main power input terminal
M4 8.1
U
V Motor power cable connection terminal

W
Ground Ground connection terminal M4 –

terminal
Shorting B1 Shorting terminals for internal braking resistor
Control bar B2 (Open when external resistor is used.) Applicable
power L1C Control power input terminal wire size:
connector L2C 1.25 to 2.0
(TM2) Note: Diagram is shown as viewed from bottom of mm 2
robot driver.
c CAUTION
1. Unplug the control power supply connector from the robot driver before
wiring.
Failure to do so may damage the robot driver.
2. When inserting the wires into the terminal, be careful not to bring the core
wire braid into contact with other conductive parts.
3. If for some reason the inserted portion of the wire is frayed, cut off that
frayed portion and restrip the wire. Then reconnect the wire securely.
Using frayed wire may damage the robot driver.
3-6
(3) Wiring precautions

Before starting wiring, make sure that the charge lamp is completely off. Use caution
because the capacitor might still be charged with high voltage creating a hazardous
condition. About 10 minutes or more after power-off use a voltmeter or similar
instrument to check that no voltage remains across the (+) and (–) terminals on the
main circuit terminal block, and then start wiring.
1) Main power input terminals (L1, L2, L3)

• Use an earth leakage breaker (ELB) to protect circuit (wiring) between the power
supply and main power input terminals (L1, L2, or L3).
3

• Some earth leakage breakers may malfunction due to effects from higher
harmonics, so use one having large current sensitivity at high frequencies.
• Connect an electromagnetic contactor that shuts off the power supply to the robot
driver to prevent a failure or accident from spreading when the robot driver's
protective function is activated.
• Do not attempt to start or stop the robot driver by turning on or off each
electromagnetic contactor provided on the primary side and secondary side of the
robot driver.
• Do not use the robot driver in an open-phase condition.
• Any of the following conditions may damage the converter module so use caution.
The power supply voltage imbalance is 3% or more.
The power supply capacity is 10 times larger than the robot driver capacity or
500kVA or more.
A sudden fluctuation occurs in the power supply.
(Example) Multiple robot drivers are connected to each other by a short bus
line.
In any case, connecting a DC reactor (DCL) is recommended.
• When turning power on or off allow at least a 5-minute time interval between
power on and off in order to avoid damage to the robot driver.
2) Motor cable connection terminals (U, V, W)

• To minimize voltage drops, use thicker wires than normally used.
3) DC reactor (DCL) connection terminals ( (+)1, (+) )

• These terminals are used to connect a DC reactor DCL for power factor
improvement.
A shorting bar is connected across terminals (+)1 and (+) at the factory prior to
shipping. When connecting a DC reactor to these terminals, disconnect the
shorting bar. When not using a DC reactor, leave the shorting bar connected.
3-7
4) External braking resistor connection terminals ( (+), RB) )

• A regenerative braking circuit and braking resistor are built into the robot drivers
(RD*-20 and RDP-25). To enhance braking capacity, you can connect an optional
external braking resistor to these terminals. In this case, disconnect the shorting
bar from the internal braking resistor terminals (B1, B2). The wiring length should
be 5 meters or less. Wire by twisting the two wires together.
• Install a resistor whose resistance is higher than the R BRmin specified in the
following table.
3 Installing a resistor whose resistance is lower than specified will damage the
regenerative braking circuit.
Robot driver model Built-in braking resistor R BR Minimum resistance R BRmin

RD*-05 None 100Ω
RD*-10 None 100Ω
RD*-20 30W 75Ω (10W, 0.5%) 50Ω
RDP-25 50W 50Ω (15W, 0.5%) 40Ω
Note: The power (wattage) of built-in braking resistor R BR is the nominal value. The
values in parentheses indicate the available average power (W) and allowable
duty ratio (%).
For details on external braking resistors, refer to 10.1, "Options".
5) DC power input terminals ( (+), (–) )

• Connect a DC power supply to these terminals when supplying DC power from an
external converter. Use a DC power supply that provides 270 to 310V DC and has
sufficient capacity.
• When supplying DC power, do not connect anything to the main power input
terminals (L1, L2, L3).
• When supplying DC power, set the "DC bus power supply" (FA-07) parameter to
"Pn". If this is not set, an open-phase or momentary power failure will be
mistakenly detected.
6) Control power input terminals (L1C, L2C)

• In addition to the main circuit power supply, this robot driver requires a control
power supply. Be sure to connect a single-phase AC power supply to these control
power input terminals (L1C, L2C). Also use a circuit (wiring) protection breaker or
earth leakage breaker along with the control power supply. Some earth leakage
breakers may malfunction due to effects from higher harmonics, so use one having
large current sensitivity at high frequencies. When turning power on or off, allow
at least a 5-minute time interval between power on and off. Turning power on or
off at shorter time intervals may damage the robot driver.
7) Shorting terminals for internal braking resistor (B1, B2)

• When using the internal braking resistor, short the terminals B1 and B2 together.
When using an external braking resistor, disconnect the shorting bar from these
terminals. (The RD*-20 and RDP-25 have an internal braking resistor.)
3-8
8) Ground terminals ( )
• To prevent electrical shock, be sure to ground the robot driver and the robot
body.
• Connect the ground terminals to a proper grounding point (Class D: 100 ohms or
less).
• The ground wire should be thicker than those generally used and as short as
possible.
Note 1: To connect wiring to the terminal block, use crimp terminals that match
the terminal width. If the crimp terminal width is too wide, then a bad
3

connection or misconnection may result.
Note 2: Separate the robot driver signal input cable and position sensor cable at
least 30cm from the main circuit power cable and control power cable. If
those cables must intersect each other, then route them so that they
intersect at right angles as shown below. The robot driver may result in
malfunction if the cables are not separated from each other.
Main circuit power cable
(L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, (+), (+)1, RB)
Control power supply cable
(L1C, L2C)
Cables should intersect at right angles.
Signal input and position sensor cables

30cm or more
3-9
(4) Peripheral cables and products
Name Function Availability

Allows setting parameters,
TOP (software for monitoring operation and
1 Option
YAMAHA RD series) displaying graphics from a PC
connected to the robot driver.
Connects to the robot position
2 Position sensor cable Standard
3 3 Power cable
sensor, brake and origin sensor.
Supplies power to the robot. Standard
4 PC connection cable Connects to a PC. Option
Connector set for I/O Mating connector and cover for

5 Standard
signals robot driver I/O connector
6 External braking resistor Boosts the braking capacity. Option
Typical wiring diagram for robot driver is shown below.
Power supply 1. TOP (software for

3-phase 200 V AC class Robot driver YAMAHA RD series)
(Single-phase 4. PC connection
200 V AC class: L1, L2) cable
Earth leakage PC (IBM PC compatible)
breaker (ELB) FUNC
CHARGE SET
Master
controller
6. External braking (+)1
resistor
I/O
Electromagnetic 5. Connector set
contactor for I/O signals
2. Position sensor cable

ENC
3. Power cable Robot
3-10
(5) Recommended wire size and wiring accessories

• Select optimal breakers by taking their breaking capacity into account.
• Use an earth leakage breaker (ELB) to ensure safety.
• Use an appropriate copper wire with a heat resistant temperature of 75˚C or more.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the specified torque. Insufficient tightening may
result in a short circuit or fire.
• Select the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker (ELB) by taking account of
the total wiring length needed to connect between the robot driver and power
supply and also between the robot driver and robot. When the total wiring length is
3
shorter than 30 meters, use a 15mA sensitivity current (per one robot driver).

Use an earth leakage breaker compatible with inverters. Conventional breakers may
malfunction by high harmonics generated from an inverter. Contact the breaker
manufacturer for details.
• Refer to the following table when selecting wiring size and wiring accessories for
robot drivers.
Main circuit
Robot Control power
power cable Earth leakage Electromagnetic
driver cable
L1, L2, L3 breaker (ELB) * contactor (MC) *
model L1C, L2C
(+)1, (+), RB, (–)
RD*-05 1.25mm 2 or more 0.5mm 2 or more EX30 (5A) H10C / HK10
RDP-25 1.25mm 2 or more 0.5mm 2 or more EX30 (10A) H10C / HK10
* : ELB and MC models listed in the above table are manufactured by Hitachi Industrial
Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
(Hitachi standard ELB products manufactured from December 1987 are compatible with
inverters.)
3-11
(6) Attaching the cover to the main circuit terminal block (TM1)
1. Insert the bottom hook of the main circuit terminal block cover into the slot in the
robot driver front panel as shown below.
2. Attach the main circuit terminal block cover into place by gently pressing on it
from the front.
3. Tighten the screw to fasten the main circuit terminal block cover to the robot
driver.
3
RD
2
X
3
Main circuit terminal block cover
3-12
3.2.3 Wiring to the control terminal block (TM2)
c CAUTION
1. Unplug the control power supply connector (TM2) from the robot driver
before wiring.
2. Insert one cable into one terminal hole of the control power connector (TM2).
Failure to follow this instruction may cause the robot driver to malfunction.
3. When inserting the wires into the terminal, be careful not to bring the core
wire braid into contact with other conductive parts.
3

4. If for some reason the inserted portion of the wire is frayed, cut off that
frayed portion and restrip the wire. Then reconnect the wire securely.
Using frayed wire might damage the robot driver.
(1) Cable termination

Strip the cable sheath as shown in Fig. 1. The cable can then be used as is. Applicable
wire size is as follows:
Solid wire ....... Wire size 1.25 to 2.0mm 2
Stranded wire ... Wire size 1.25 to 2.0mm 2
8 to 9mm
Fig. 1 Control power cable termination
(2) Connection method

Insert the core wire of the cable into the terminal hole of the control power connector
(TM2) shown in Fig. 2 by using either of the following methods of Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.
Make sure the wire does not come loose if pulled.
1) Insert the wire by using the supplied lever as shown in Fig. 3.
2) Insert the wire by using a small flat-blade screwdriver as shown in Fig. 4.
L2C
L1
B1B2
Fig. 2 Control power connector
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
3-13
3.2.4 Input/output signal wiring

(1) Input/output signal connector
Pin No.1 of the input/output signal
connector I/O is located at the upper
FUNC
left when viewed from the front of the CHARE SET
robot driver as shown on the right.
3 The table below shows the signal

assignment on the input/output signal
connector I/O (robot driver side). 1 26
Input/output signal
connector I/O
50
25
Robot driver front view
Pin Pin Pin Pin

Signal name Signal name
No. symbol No. symbol
1 P24 Interface power 26 SON Servo ON
2 PLC Intelligent input common 27 RS Alarm reset
3 – – 28 FOT Forward overtravel
4 TL Torque limit 29 ROT Reverse overtravel
5 B24 Brake power input (24V) 30 CM1 Interface power common
6 B0 Brake power input (0V) 31 B0 Brake power input (0V)
7 – – 32 ORG Return-to-origin (homing)
8 ORL Origin sensor 33 PEN Pulse train input enable
9 CER Position error clear 34 ALME Alarm (emitter)
10 CM1 Interface power common 35 SRD Servo ready (collector)
11 ALM Alarm (collector) 36 – –
Positioning complete
12 INP 37 – –
(collector)
13 BK Brake release relay output 38 – –
14 – – 39 INPE (emitter)
15 PLSP Position command pulse (P) 40 SIGP Position command sign (P)
16 PLSN Position command pulse (N) 41 SIGN Position command sign (N)
17 – – 42 SRDE Servo ready (emitter)
18 – – 43 – –
19 – – 44 – –
Analog input /output
20 L 45 – –
common
21 OAP Phase A signal output (P) 46 OBP Phase B signal output (P)
22 OAN Phase A signal output (N) 47 OBN Phase B signal output (N)
23 OZP Phase Z signal output (P) 48 OZ Phase Z detection
24 OZN Phase Z signal output (N) 49 L Phase Z detection common
25 AO1 Analog monitor 1 50 AO2 Analog monitor 2
3-14
On the mating input/output signal connector (cable side), pin No.1 is located at the
upper left when viewed from the soldered side (inner side) as shown below.
The following connector is supplied with the controller as the input/output signal
connector (cable side).
Product name Type No. Manufacturer
Connector plug 10150-3000PE (soldered) Sumitomo 3M
Connector cover
non-shield shell kit
10350-52A0-008 Sumitomo 3M 3

1 P24 26 SON
2 PLC 27 RS
3 − 28 FOT
1 26 4 TL 29 ROT
2 27
3 28 5 B24 30 CM1
4 29 30
5 6 BO 31 BO
6 31
7 − 32 ORG
8 ORL 33 PEN
9 CER 34 ALME
10 CM1 35 SRD
11 ALM 36 −
22 47 48
23 12 INP 37 −
24 49 50
25 13 BK 38 −
14 − 39 INPE
15 PLSP 40 SIGP
Soldered side of 16 PLSN 41 SIGN
input/output signal connector 17 − 42 SRDE
18 − 43 −
19 − 44 −
20 L 45 −
21 OAP 46 OBP
22 OAN 47 OBN
23 OZP 48 OZ
24 OZN 49 L
25 AO1 50 AO2
Note 1: For robots using an origin sensor or robots equipped with a mechanical
brake, the input/output signal connector is shipped with pin No. 1, 8, 10,
13 and 31 soldered.
Note 2: Brake release relay output (BK) is not available from the RDP.
3-15
(2) Input/output signal connection diagram

Standard input/output signal connections are shown below.
Robot driver
15 PLSP 1507 OAP 21
Position sensor
Pulse train position OAN 22 Phase A signal output
16 PLSN
command (pulse)
40 SIGP 1507 OBP 46
Position sensor
Pulse train position
3 command (sign)
41 SIGN OBN 47
OZP 23
Phase B signal output
Position sensor
OZN 24 Phase Z signal output

Origin sensor
8 ORL 4.7k7 OZ 48
24V Phase Z detection
10 CM1 L 49
Phase Z detection common
DC24V
1 P24
Logic ground
Interface power AO1 25
2 PLC Monitor output 1
Contact input common
26 SON4.7k7 AO2 50
Servo ON Monitor output 2
20
27 RS 4.7k7 Analog output common
Alarm reset L
4 TL 4.7k7 Logic ground
Torque limit SRD 35
Servo ready
28 FOT 4.7k7
Forward overtravel SRDE 42
29 ROT4.7k7 ALM 11
Reverse ovetravel Alarm
32 ORG4.7k7 ALME 34
Return-to-origin INP 12
Pulse train input 33 PEN 4.7k7
INPE 39
enable Brake output and coil
9 CER4.7k7 (Note 1)
Position error Brake release BK 13
counter clear relay
30 CM1 Br
Interface power common
BRK 31.6
B0 Brake power
DC24V
5
B24
The above diagram shows a sink type output module using a power supply for internal
input.
3-16
(3) Input/output signal functions

Input/output signal functions are summarized in the following table.
Terminal Electrical
Type Terminal name Description
symbol specifications
Supplies 24V DC for contact inputs.
Connecting this signal to the PLC
terminal allows using the internal
P24 Interface power power supply. Use this terminal only for
contact input. Do not use for controlling
external equipment connected to the
robot driver, such as brakes.
3
This is a ground signal for the power DC +24V±10%

supply connected to P24. If using the 80mA max.
Interface power
CM1 internal power supply then input a
common
contact signal between this signal and
the contact-point signal.
Connect this signal to the power
Intelligent input supply common contact input. Connect
PLC
common an external supply or internal power
supply (P24).
Setting this signal to ON turns the
servo on (supplies power to motor to
SON Servo ON control it). This signal is also used for
estimating magnetic pole position when
FA-90 is set to oFF2.
After an alarm has tripped, inputting
Input this signal cancels the alarm. But
signal RS Alarm reset before inputting this reset signal, first
set the SON terminal to OFF and
eliminate the cause of the trouble.
When this signal is ON, the torque limit
TL Torque limit
is enabled.
When this signal is OFF, the robot will Contact input
FOT Forward overtravel not run in forward direction. Close: ON
(Forward direction limit signal) Open: OFF
When this signal is OFF, the robot will 5mA (at 24V)
ROT Reverse overtravel not run in reverse direction. per input
(Reverse direction limit signal)
Input an origin limit switch signal
ORL Origin sensor
showing the origin area.
Inputting this signal starts return-to-
ORG Return-to-origin
origin operation.
When this signal is turned on, the
Pulse train input
PEN pulse train position command input is
enable
enabled.
Inputting this signal clears the position
Position error counter deviation (position error) counter.
CER
clear (Position command value is viewed as
current position.)
0 to ±10V
Analog This is the ground for the analog Input
L Analog common
common signal. impedance:
approx. 10kΩ
3-17
Terminal Electrical
Type Terminal name Description
symbol specifications
This signal is output when the servo
SRD is ready to turn on (with main power
Servo ready
SRDE supply turned on and no alarms
tripped.) Open collector
and emitter
An alarm signal is output when an
signal output
Output ALM alarm has tripped. (This signal is ON in
Alarm +30V DC or
signal ALME normal state and OFF when an alarm
less, 50mA
3 INP
has tripped.)
This signal is output when the deviation
between the command position and
max. per
output
INPE current position is within the preset

positioning range.
BK When the servo is ON, this terminal
Relay Brake release relay 24V DC
(B24) outputs a signal to allow releasing the
output output 375mA max.
(Note 1) brake. (FLIP-X series only)
Outputs speed detection values, torque
AO1 Monitor output 1 commands, etc. as analog signal
voltages for monitoring.
Signals to output are selected by 0 to ±3.0V
Monitor setting parameters. Load
output AO2 Monitor output 2 These signals are only for monitoring. impedance:
Do not use for control. 3kΩ or more
Monitor output This is the ground for the monitor

L
common signal.
PLSP Position command Select one of the following signal forms

pulse as the pulse-train position command
PLSN (pulse signal) input.
Position Line driver
(1) Command pulse + direction signal
command input
SIGP Position command (2) Forward direction pulse train +
pulse reverse direction pulse train
SIGN (sign signal) (3) Phase difference 2-phase pulse
OAP Outputs monitor signal obtained by

Position sensor
dividing "phase A" signal of position
OAN Phase A signal
sensor.
OBP Outputs monitor signal obtained by

Position sensor Line driver
dividing "phase B" signal of position
OBN Phase B signal signal output
sensor.
Position
sensor OZP
monitor Position sensor Outputs monitor signal for position
OZN Phase Z signal sensor "phase Z" signal.
OZ Phase Z detection Open collector

Outputs monitor signal for position output +30V
Phase Z detection sensor "phase Z" signal. DC or less,
L 50mA max.
common
B24 Input 24V DC brake power to this
Brake Brake power input
(Note 1) terminal
power 24V DC input
input B0 Common terminal input for brake
Brake power common
(Note 1) power
Note 1:B24, BO and BK are available only with RDX, and not with RDP.
3-18
(4) Brake and origin sensor connector

Among the input/output signals, the brake and origin sensor signals are connected to a
connector that is branched from the input/output signal connector. By connecting this
branched connector to the position sensor cable, the brake can be released and
return-to-origin performed by sensor method.
Use this connector only when using a robot with a mechanical brake or robot's return-
to-origin method is sensor method.
Robot driver
Host device
3

FUNC
CHARGE SET
(+)1
I/O
Robot driver Robot
13 1
BK
ENC Br
31 2
B0
Robot 1 3
P24
8 4
ORL
10 5
CM1
Pin No. on Terminal Signal name Pin No. on robot

connector side symbol driver side
1 BK Brake release relay output 13
2 B0 Brake power input (0V) 31
3 P24 Power supply for input signal 1
4 ORL Origin sensor 8
5 CM1 Power supply (common) for input signal 10
3-19
(5) Details of input/output signal wiring

1) Contact input signal
• Contact signals should be input through switches and relays. Figures (a) and (b)
below show wiring diagrams using an external power supply or internal interface
power supply.
Robot driver Robot driver
P24 Short-circuit P24
3 External power supply

(DC24V) PLC
DC24V
PLC
DC24V
Switch Switch
Input 4.7k7 Input 4.7k7
CM1 CM1
(a) When using an external power supply (b) When using the internal power supply
• Use an external power supply for devices requiring power for controlling a
contact output, such as a programmable controller output module. (Do not use
the internal interface power supply of the robot driver.) Figures (c) and (d) below
show examples for connecting the transistor output module (sink type or source
type) of a programmable controller.
Robot driver Robot driver
Programmable Programmable
P24
controller External power DC24V P24
controller External power DC24V
supply (DC24V) supply (DC24V)
S PLC C PLC
Output
Output Input 4.7k7 Output Input 4.7k7
control
Output
control
C CM1 S CM1
(c) When using a sink type output module (d) When using a source type output module
and an external power supply and an external power supply
3-20
• When using an external power supply, do not connect to the internal interface
power of the robot driver. If connected, current may flow as shown in figure (e)
below when the external power supply is shut off, causing the input to turn on.
Robot driver
Programmable
controller External power supply P24 DC24V
(DC24V)
S PLC
Shorted when
Example of sink
3
power is shut off.
Output Input 4.7k7 type output module
Output
control

C CM1
(e) Current flow when external power supply is shut off
• If using switch contacts or relay contacts as the contact input signal, then use
contacts such as crossbar twin contacts that make good contact even at weak
currents or voltages.
• Do not short the internal interface power P24 to CM1. The robot driver may fail.
• The electrical specifications for input signals are shown in the following table.
(Power supply voltage 24V DC)
Item Unit Minimum Maximum Condition
Input impedance kΩ 4.5 5.7
Input current at OFF mA 0 0.3
Power supply voltage
Input current at ON mA 3.0 5.2
24V DC
3-21
2) Open collector output signal

• Connect a relay coil or the input module of a programmable controller as shown
in Figures (a) and (b) below. When using a relay, connect a diode as a surge
absorber in parallel with the coil. Connect that diode as shown in Figure (a) so
that the current flow direction of the diode is opposite the direction that voltage is
applied to the coil.
Programmable
Robot driver Robot driver controller
3 Surge-absorbing diode
Output
C
Output Input
(Collector) External power External power

Relay coil supply supply
(DC24V) (DC24V)
(Emitter) (Emitter)
(a) Relay coil connection (b) Programmable controller connection
• Prepare an external power supply for output signals. Do not use the internal
interface power supply (P24-CM1) of the robot driver. The robot driver may fail.
• Electrical specifications for contact output signals are shown in the following
table.
Output power supply
V – 30
voltage
Output current at ON mA – 50
Leakage current at
mA – 0.1
output OFF
Output saturation
V 0.5 1.5 Output current 50mA
voltage at ON
3-22
3) Monitor output signal

• Connect a meter (voltmeter) or recorder for monitoring speed detection values
and torque command values as shown in Figure (a) below. Use this signal only for
monitoring and not for commands to other control devices. (Output signal
accuracy is about ±10%.) Each monitor output signal cable should be a shielded,
twisted pair cable with the analog common (L--- connector pin No. 20, 49).
Connect the cable shield to ground ( ) on the robot driver side. (The I/O
connector case of the robot driver is internally connected to the ground.)
Robot driver 3

AO1, Shielded cable Voltmeter
D/A converter
AO2
L
Connector
Logic ground case
(a) Monitor output signal connection
• The impedance of the load to connect to this monitor signal should be 3kΩ or
more.
Do not connect the monitor output signal (AO1, AO2) to the common (L) or
another power supply. The robot driver may fail.
• Electrical specifications for monitor output signals are shown in the following
table.
Item Unit Specifications
Output voltage V 0 to ±3.0
Load impedance kΩ 3.0 or more
Output voltage accuracy % ±10 or more
Output signal delay time ms Approx. 1
3-23
4) Position command signal

• Connect the pulse train signal for position command. As shown in the figure
below, the line receiver receives a pulse train signal output from the line driver
(AM26LS31 or equivalent) of the master controller.
Each position command signal cable should be a shielded, twisted pair cable.
Connect the cable shield to ground ( ) on the robot driver side. (The I/O
connector case of the robot driver is internally connected to the ground.)
3 Line driver
(AM26LS31) Shielded cable PLSP,
SIGP
Robot driver
1507
PLSN,
SIGN
Connector
case
• Electrical specifications and timing chart for position pulse signals are shown in
the following table.
Electrical specifications for position command pulses

Item Unit Specifications Condition
Input current of logic 1 mA 8 to 15
• FWD/REV pulse
input Line driver
Maximum input pulses/s 2M
• Command pulse signal
pulse rate
+ sign input
(Frequency)
• Phase difference Line driver
pulses/s 500k
90° pulse input signal
3-24
Position command pulse timing chart

Pulse train signal form Pulse train input timing
(1) Pulse train When FA-11 = P-S (Movement direction is reversed if FA-11 = -P-S.)
command See note below.
PLS signal "1"

t1 t2 "0"
t0 t S4
3
t S2
T "1"
SIG signal
t S1 t3 t S3 t4
"0"

Logic
FWD signal REV signal
(2) FWD/REV pulse When FA-11 = F-r (Movement direction is reversed if FA-11 = r-F.)
See note below.
PLS signal "1"

t1 t2 "0"
t0
T
"1"
SIG signal
"0"
t S0
(3) Phase difference When FA-11 = A-b (Movement direction is reversed if FA-11 = b-A.)
2-phase pulse See note below.
* In the case of "1"
phase difference PLS signal
(Phase A) "0"
2-phase pulse, t1 t0 t2
the count is T
multiplied by 4. "1"
SIG signal
(Phase B) t5 t6 "0"
Note: When at logic 1, the pulse train input current direction is PLSP→PLSN, SIGP→SIGN.
Position command pulse timing values

Pulse train signal form Line driver signal
(See above)
(1), (2) above (3) above
Rise time : t 1, t 3 0.1μs or less 0.1μs or less
Fall time : t 2, t 4 0.1μs or less 0.1μs or less
Timing
Switching time : t S0, t S1, t S2, t S3, t S4 3μs or more –
values
Phase difference : t 5, t 6 –
Pulse width : (t 0/T)×100 50±10% 50±10%
Maximum pulse rate (frequency) 2M (pulses/s) 500k (pulses/s)
3-25
5) Position sensor monitor signal

• The position sensor signal is output as phase A, B, and Z signals. The line driver
output signals (OAP-OAN, OBP-OBN, OZP-OZN) should be connected to the line
receiver (input impedance: 220 to 330 Ω) as shown in Figure (a) below. The open
collector output signal (OZ-L) should be connected to the input device as shown
in Figure (b). Use a shielded, twisted pair cable for each position sensor monitor
signal cable. Connect the cable shield to ground ( ) on the robot driver side. (The
I/O connector case of the robot driver is internally connected to the ground.)
3 Robot driver
Line driver OAP, Line receiver
(AM26LS31 or equivalent) OBP, Shielded cable (AM26LS32 or equivalent)
OZP,
OAN,
OBN, R
OZN,
R=220
to 3307
L
L
(a) Line driver output signal connection
Robot driver
High-speed
2.2k7 photocoupler
External power
Open collector Shielded cable SIGN
supply
OZ (DC24V)
L
Connector
case
Logic ground
(b) Open collector output signal connection

• This signal is output as a high speed signal (1MHz for phase A and B signals)
depending on the division ratio setting for the position sensor monitor signal. So
use a noise-shielded cable and a receiving circuit designed to handle high-speed
signals. When the open collector output of phase Z signal is received by a
photocoupler, be sure to use a high-speed photocoupler (1MHz or more).
• The cable length for this signal should be 3 meters or less. Install this wiring as far
apart as possible from the main circuit cable and the relay control cable.
• Do not short the line driver output signals to each other or connect them to
another power supply. The robot driver may fail.
• Electrical specifications for the line driver signal output conform to those of
general-purpose line drivers (AM26LS31 or equivalent). Electrical specifications
for the phase Z detection signal of the open collector are shown in the following
table.
Output power supply voltage V 4 30
Output current at ON mA 0 50
Leakage current at output OFF mA 0 0.1
Output saturation voltage at ON V 0 0.4 Output current 50mA
3-26
3.2.5 Wiring for position sensor signals

(1) Position sensor signal connector
Connector compatible with lead-free solder
Type No. Manufacturer
54599-1015 Molex
• Description of terminal code 3

RDP ENC connector terminal symbol

Terminal Terminal
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
symbol symbol
1 EP 2 EG Position sensor
Position sensor
power supply
3 EP power supply 5V 4 EG Common 0V
5 SIN+ Sine output (+) 6 SIN– Sine output (–)
7 COS+ Cosine output (+) 8 COS– Cosine output (–)
9 Z+ Phase Z (+) output 10 Z– Phase Z (–) output
RDX ENC connector terminal symbol

Terminal Terminal
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
symbol symbol
1 R1 Position sensor 2 R2 Position sensor
excitation input excitation input
3 R1 terminal 4 R2 terminal
S2-S4 coil output S2-S4 coil output
5 S2 6 S4
terminal terminal
S1-S3 coil output S1-S3 coil output
7 S1 8 S3
terminal terminal
9 – – 10 – –
2 4 6 8 10
EG(R2) EG(R2) SIN-(S4) COS-(S3) Z–
1 3 5 7 9
EP(R1) EP(R1) SIN+(S2) COS+(S1) Z+
Numbers in parentheses indicate position sensors used with the RDX.
3-27
MEMO
3-28
Chapter 4 Operation
This chapter explains typical product operation and shows simple trial runs.
Contents

4.1.1 Position control by pulse train input 4-2
4.2 Test Run 4-3
4.2.1 Jog from the digital operator 4-3
4.2.2 Making a test run using "TOP"
software for RD series 4-4
4.3 Emergency stop 4-6
4. Operation
4.1 Control and operation
c CAUTION
1. To prevent unstable or erratic operation never make drastic adjustments to
the unit. Doing so may cause injury.
2. Install a safety circuit that actuates an electromagnetic contactor to cut off
the main circuit power supply in case of an alarm.
3. If an alarm has occurred, eliminate the cause of the alarm and ensure
safety. Then reset the alarm and restart the operation.
4. If a momentary power outage occurs and power is restored, the unit might
suddenly restart so do not approach the machine at that time. (Design the
4
machine so that personal safety is ensured even if it suddenly restarts.)
Operation
5. Make sure that the AC power specifications match the product power
specifications.
Using the wrong power specifications may cause injury.
6. While power is being supplied, do not touch any parts inside the robot driver
or its terminals.
Also, do not check the signals or attach/detach the cables.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or injury.
7. While power is being supplied, do not touch any terminals on the robot
driver even if the robot is stopped.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or fire.
8. This product does not incorporate any power failure detection function.
When necessary, install an external power failure detection circuit and
configure an appropriate circuit that stops the operation safely when a
power failure is detected. (Refer to 4.3, "Emergency stop", in this chapter.)
MANDATORY
INSTALL AN EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP CIRCUIT SO THAT YOU CAN
IMMEDIATELY STOP OPERATION AND SHUT OFF POWER WHENEVER NEEDED.
4-1
4. Operation
4.1.1 Position control by pulse train input

This method controls the position with external pulse train signals.
1) Make connections as shown below and check that they are correct.
2) Turn on the ELB (earth leakage breaker) and then turn on the control power to the
robot driver.
The digital operator comes on and "d-00" is displayed. (This is the factory default
setting.)
3) Set the "Pulse train input mode" (FA-11) parameter.
4 4) Set the "Electronic gear numerator/denominator" (FA-12, FA-13) parameters.

(These are set by default so that 1 pulse is equal to a 1µm position command.)
5) Check that the "Control mode" (FA-00) parameter is set to "Position control" (P-S).
Operation
6) Turn on the FOT and ROT terminals.

7) Turn on the electromagnetic contactor MC and then turn on the main circuit power
supply.
8) Turn on the SON terminal. (On the RDP, magnetic pole position is found right after
power is first turned on.)
9) Turn on the PEN terminal and input the position pulse command. (The robot will
move to the commanded position.)
To stop the robot, turn off the PEN terminal after completing positioning. Check
that the robot has stopped and then turn off the SON terminal.
ELB MC Robot driver

L1 Digital operator U Robot
3-phase
L2 V
200 to 230 V AC
L3 W
200 to 230V
L1C
L2C ENC
Down transformer
P24
PLC
SON
RS
FOT
ROT
PEN
CER
CM1
PLSP
Position PLSN
pulse command
SIGP
SIGN
Ground (100 ohms or less)

The above diagram shows a sink type output module using a power supply for internal
input.
4-2
4. Operation
4.2 Test Run

This section explains how to make a test run.
4.2.1 Jog from the digital operator

Jog can be performed from the digital operator just by wiring the robot driver to the robot
and power supply.
This test run method allows checking the wiring between the robot driver, robot and
power supply.
(1) Jog operation 4

Perform the following steps with the SON terminal turned off.
Operation
FUNC Blinking 1) Operate the FUNC and keys to
show the "Jogging speed" (Fb-03)
parameter setting.
× 3 times 2) Set the operation speed by using

Blinking the , and keys. (The
example on the left shows the
operating procedure for changing
only the run direction.)
To reverse the run direction, set the
or speed with a negative sign. Enter
Blinking the sign in the second digit column
from the left on the LED display.
SET : Saves the setting.

FUNC : Does not save 3) To perform jog operation, select the
the setting. Blinking most significant digit with the
key.
4) Press the key while in the

above state.
Run Jog operation now starts to move
the robot, so use caution.
5) Press any of the following keys to

stop the operation.
key: Continues displaying the
setting.
SET key: Saves the speed setting.
FUNC key: Returns to the menu
display without saving the
speed setting.
Note: When a PHASER series robot is used, magnetic pole position estimation must
be performed before this operation. For information on magnetic pole
position estimation,refer to section 5.17, "Magnetic pole position estimation
action".
4-3
4. Operation
4.2.2 Making a test run using "TOP" software for RD series

Jog can be run from a PC. During this jog operation, wiring checks can be made for the
robot driver, robot and power supply because no outside connections to the I/O
connector are needed. For details, refer to the TOP (software for RD series) user's
manual.
There are two types of jog operation: (1) normal jog performed at a specified speed and
(2) pulse feed jog that moves a distance equal to a specified number of pulses.
Each of these is explained below.
4 Note 1: Do not input any signals through the I/O connector including the SON
terminal during this operation. Doing so runs the operation according to the
Operation
input terminal.
Note 2: In this jog operation, the robot moves at an acceleration/deceleration time of
0 seconds and the current settings for control gain and speed limit
parameters.
Note 3: This jog operation cannot be used simultaneously with the TOP monitor
display.
Note 4: When a PHASER series robot is used, magnetic pole position estimation must
be performed before this operation. For information on magnetic pole
position estimation,refer to section 5.17, "Magnetic pole position estimation
action".
(1) Operation in normal jog

In normal jog, the robot moves at a constant speed specified by the speed command
until a stop command is input.
After starting the TOP (software for RD series), run the jog operation as explained
below.
1) After connecting the TOP to the robot driver, click the [Test Run and Adjustment] button on
the opening screen.
(Click the [Jogging] tab.)
2) Enter the speed command for jog operation.
3) Check safety and then click the button that indicates the direction to move the robot.
(The robot will start moving in the specified direction.)
4) Click the [Stop] button to stop operation.
Note: The robot moves during this operation, so check safety before starting
operation.
4-4
4. Operation
(2) Pulse feed jog operation

In this jog operation, the robot moves in position control mode up to the position
specified by the position command.
After starting the TOP software for RD series, run jog operation as explained below.
Refer to the TOP software user's manual for details.
1) Click the [Test Run and Adjustment] button on the opening screen.
(Click the [Jogging] tab.)
2) Enter the number of feed pulses.
3) Check safety and then click the [Forward] or [Reverse] button.
(The robot will start moving in the specified direction and stop at the position specified by
the command.)
4) After positioning is complete, the display returns to the initial screen.
4
Operation
The servo is still ON at this point so click the [Stop] button.
Note: The robot moves during this operation, so check safety before starting
operation.
To stop positioning, click [Stop] button.
4-5
4. Operation
4.3 Emergency stop

To safely stop the robot in case of an emergency, configure an emergency stop circuit
while referring to the explanations below.
For details on input terminal functions and parameters, refer to 5.2, "Input terminal
functions" and 6.3.2, "Setup parameter description".
(1) Ser vo OFF

When the SON signal is turned off, the servo is OFF and the braking is applied by the
dynamic brake.
4 • The DB Operation selection (FA-16) must be set to "SoF". The braking is not applied
by the dynamic brake unless this selection is set to "SoF".
Operation
• When the Servo OFF wait time (FA-24) is set, the servo is OFF and the braking is
applied by the dynamic brake after the SON signal has been turned off and the
servo OFF wait time has elapsed.
(2) How to shorten the braking distance

Shorten the breaking distance by producing the deceleration torque through the servo
control.
Example) Deceleration torque is produced by clamping the speed command at zero.

• The servo OFF wait time is set, and the SON signal and FOT/ROT signal
are turned off at the same time in case of an emergency.
• The speed command is clamped at zero by the FOT/ROT signal OFF
while the servo OFF is delayed. At this time, the deceleration torque is
produced to shorten the braking distance.
FOT
ROT
SON
Main power
Servo
FA-24
V
Speed command
0
V
Current speed
0
Note 1: If the heavy braking is applied as described in the example shown above
when the payload of the robot is large or offset, the deceleration torque
becomes too large, causing the robot to break. In this case, it is
recommended that the FOT/ROT signal is not turned off and the position
command is changed so that the speed command changes gradually.
Note 2: When the servo is OFF if a trip occurs, the power to the motor is shut down
immediately even when the Servo OFF wait time has been set.
4-6
Chapter 5 Functions
This chapter explains the input/output signal functions of this product and its major control
functions.
Contents
5.1 Terminal function list 5-1

5.2 Input terminal functions 5-3
5.3 Output terminal functions 5-6
5.4 Return-to-origin function 5-9
5.5 Analog output function 5-20
5.6 Pulse train input function 5-21
5.7 Smoothing function 5-24
5.8 Position sensor monitor function 5-25
5.9 Adjusting the control gain 5-26
5.9.1 Basic rules of gain adjustment 5-26
5.9.2 Setting the mechanical rigidity and response 5-27
5.9.3 Adjusting the position control loop 5-28
5.10 Offline auto-tuning function 5-29
5.10.1 Offline auto-tuning method 5-29
5.10.2 Offline auto-tuning using the TOP software 5-32
5.11 Gain change function 5-34
5.11.1 Changing the control gain 5-34
5.12 Clearing the alarm log and setting
the default values 5-37
5.13 Motor rotating direction 5-39
5.13.1 FLIP-X series phase sequence 5-39
5.13.2 PHASER series phase sequence 5-39
5.14 Speed limit function 5-40
5.15 Fast positioning function 5-41
5.16 Notch filter function 5-42
5.17 Magnetic pole position estimation action 5-43
5.18 Magnetic pole position estimation
and parameters 5-44
5. Functions
5.1 Terminal function list

Terminal
Type Terminal name Function
symbol
Supplies 24V DC for contact inputs. Connecting this
signal to the PLC terminal allows using the internal
P24 Interface power power supply. Use this terminal only for contact
input. Do not use for controlling external equipment
connected to the robot driver, such as brakes.
This is a ground signal for the power supply
Interface power connected to P24. If using the internal power supply
CM1
common then input a contact signal between this signal and
the contact-point signal.
Connect this signal to the power supply common
PLC
Intelligent input
common
contact input. Connect an external supply or internal
power supply (P24). 5
Setting this signal to ON turns the servo on (supplies
Functions
power to motor to control it). This signal is also used
SON Servo ON
for estimating magnetic pole position when FA-90 is
set to oFF2.
Contact After an alarm has tripped, inputting this signal
point cancels the alarm. But before inputting this reset
RS Alarm reset
input signal, first set the SON terminal to OFF and
signal eliminate the cause of the trouble.
TL Torque limit When this signal is ON, the torque limit is enabled.
When this signal is OFF, the robot will not run in
Forward
FOT forward direction.
overtravel
(Forward direction limit signal)
When this signal is OFF, the robot will not run in
Reverse
ROT reverse direction.
overtravel
(Reverse direction limit signal)
Input an origin limit switch signal showing the origin
ORL Origin sensor
area.
ORG Return-to-origin Inputting this signal starts return-to-origin operation.
Pulse train input When this signal is turned on, the pulse train position
PEN
enable command input is enabled.
Inputting this signal clears the position deviation
Position error
CER (position error) counter. (Position command value is
counter clear
viewed as current position.)
Analog
L Analog common This is the ground for the analog signal.
common
This signal is output when the servo is ready to turn
SRD
Servo ready on (with main power supply turned on and no alarms
SRDE
tripped.)
Contact
An alarm signal is output when an alarm has tripped.
point ALM
Alarm (This signal is ON in normal state and OFF if an
output ALME
alarm has tripped.)
signal
This signal is output when the deviation between the
INP Positioning
command position and current position is within the
INPE complete
preset positioning range.
5-1
5. Functions
Terminal
Type Terminal name Function
symbol
Relay BK Brake release When the servo is ON, this terminal outputs a signal
output (B24) relay output to allow releasing the brake. (FLIP-X series only)
Outputs speed detection values, torque commands,
AO1 Monitor output 1 etc. as analog signal voltages for monitoring.
Signals to output are selected by setting parameters.
Monitor These signals are only for monitoring. Do not use for
output AO2 Monitor output 2
control.
Monitor output
L This is the ground for the monitor signal.
common
PLSP Position Select one of the following signal forms as the pulse-
command pulse train position command input.
Position PLSN (pulse signal) (1) Command pulse + direction signal
5 command SIGP
SIGN
Position
command pulse
(sign signal)
(2) Forward direction pulse train + reverse direction
pulse train
(3) Phase difference 2-phase pulse
Functions
OAP Position sensor Outputs monitor signal obtained by dividing "phase

OAN "phase A" signal A" signal of position sensor.
OBP Position sensor Outputs monitor signal obtained by dividing "phase

OBN "phase B" signal B" signal of position sensor.
Position OZP Position sensor Outputs monitor signal for position sensor "phase Z"
sensor
OZN "phase Z" signal signal.
monitor
"Phase Z"
OZ
detection
Outputs monitor signal for position sensor "phase Z"
"Phase Z" signal.
L detection
common
Brake power
Brake B24 Input 24V DC brake power to this terminal.
input
power
input Brake power
B0 Common terminal input for brake power.
common
5-2
5. Functions
5.2 Input terminal functions

Functions of the robot driver input terminals are described below.
SON terminal
Related parameters
Setting this signal to ON turns the servo on
(supplies power to the servo). FA-16 : DB Operation selection
This signal is also used by the magnetic pole FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
position estimation operation of the RDP. See
5.17, "Magnetic pole position estimation
action" for more details.
• Receives a servo-ON signal and enters the servo-ON state (when SRD is ON) only
when the main circuit power supply is connected and no alarm has tripped. Unless
all these conditions are met, no power is supplied even when this signal is ON.
5
However, magnetic pole position estimation can be performed even if SRD is not
Functions
ON.
• When the "DB operation selection" (FA-16) parameter is set to "SoF" (during servo
OFF), the dynamic brake engages by turning the servo off.
• Period from input of a servo-ON signal until the operation is ready to start is 20ms.
• By changing the "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting, the servo can also be
turned on when this input terminal is opened.
• When the SON signal is switched from OFF to ON, the position command is set to
the current position and the deviation (position error) counter is cleared.
RS terminal
When an alarm has tripped, setting the SON Related parameters
signal to OFF and this RS signal to ON clears FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
the tripped alarm state, and operation can
resume.
• If no alarm has tripped, this signal is ignored even if set to ON.
• When an alarm has tripped and then this signal is switched from OFF to ON, the
alarm trip state is canceled if the ON state lasts more than 20ms.
• Even if this signal remains at the ON state, reset operation is performed only once.
• By changing the "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting, alarms can also be reset
when this input terminal is opened.
• The RS terminal might not always be able to cancel a tripped state, due to the
problem that triggered the alarm. See "9.3 Troubleshooting".
5-3
5. Functions
TL terminal
Setting this terminal to ON enables torque Related parameters
limit. Use the parameters Fb-07 through Fb-10 FA-00 : Control mode
to determine the torque limit values. FA-17 : Torque limit mode
Fb-07 to 10 : Torque limit value 1 to 4
FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
• By changing the "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting, torque limit can also be
enabled when this input terminal is opened.
• The parameters Fb-07 through Fb-10 limit the torque in each quadrant as shown in
the figure below. (However, use the absolute value as the torque limit value when
entering the parameters.)
Torque
5 Fb-08
Second
quadrant First
quadrant
Fb-07
Functions
Speed
Fb-09
Third Fb-10
quadrant Fourth
quadrant
FOT/ROT terminals
Related parameters
These terminals connect to operating range
limit switches in order to prevent overtravel. FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
• When this signal is turned on, drive is allowed.

• To prevent overtravel, the internal speed command limit value in that direction is
set to 0.
• By changing the "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting, drive is also allowed
when this input terminal is opened.
• An overtravel error (E25) occurs if the servo is ON for more than 1 second after the
FOT and ROT were both set to OFF.
• The FOT and ROT terminal function does not change even if the FA-14 (Motor
revolution direction) setting is changed. The FOT always prohibits drive in the CCW
direction and the ROT prohibits drive in the CW direction.
• When operating the robot with the RDP, the magnetic pole position estimation
should be performed with the FOT and ROT set to ON.
• A magnetic pole position estimation error (E95) occurs if either of the FOT or ROT
is set to OFF while the magnetic pole position is being estimated.
5-4
5. Functions
PEN terminal
Related parameters
The position command pulse input is valid
(enabled) only when this signal is ON. FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
• The position command value can be refreshed by pulse train input while this signal
is ON.
• The "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting allows position pulse train input to be
enabled when this input terminal is opened.
CER terminal
Related parameters
This signal clears the deviation (position error)
counter to "0" by setting the position command
value as the current position during position
control.
FC-01 : Input terminal polarity setting
5
Functions
• This signal is only valid during position control. The position command value is set
to the current position value at the instant this signal is switched from OFF to ON.
Since this signal turns on at the pulse edge, the counter clearing does not continue
even if this signal is kept ON. To clear the counter again, set this signal to OFF and
then back ON again.
• By changing the "Input terminal polarity" (FC-01) setting, the deviation counter can
also be cleared when this input terminal is opened.
ORG terminal
When servo is ON, tuning this signal ON Related parameters
performs return-to-origin. See 5.4, "Return-to- FA-23: Homing mode
origin function" for more information. Fb-12: Homing speed 1 (fast)
Fb-13: Homing speed 2 (slow)
FC-01: Input terminal polarity setting
• When return-to-origin is complete, INP turns ON. If this signal is turned OFF before
return-to-origin is complete, the movement is interrupted and INP stays OFF.
• Since this signal turns ON at the pulse edge, only one return-to-origin is performed
even if this signal is kept ON.
ORL terminal
Use this signal when performing return-to- Related parameters
origin by sensor method. See 5.4, "Return-to- FA-23: Homing mode
origin function" for more information. FC-01: Input terminal polarity setting
Use this signal only when the connected
robot's return-to-origin method is sensor
method. No additional wiring is required since
the connection to the robot is made via the
input/output connector.
5-5
5. Functions
5.3 Output terminal functions

Robot driver output terminal functions are described next.
SRD terminal
This signal is output when the main circuit Related parameters
power is connected and no alarm has tripped. FC-02 : Output terminal polarity setting
Servo-ON signals can be accepted when this
signal is ON, but cannot be accepted if this
signal is OFF.
• On the RDP, this signal is not output unless magnetic pole position estimation
ended correctly. See 5.17, "Magnetic pole position estimation action" for more
5 details.
• By changing the "Output terminal polarity" (FC-02) setting, this output terminal can
also be opened when the servo is ready.
Functions
ALM terminal
Related parameters
This signal indicates that an alarm has tripped,
and can be set to "normally open" or "normally FC-02 : Output terminal polarity setting
closed" by the "Output terminal polarity
setting" (FC-02). (Default setting is "normally
closed" contact.) The table below shows the
relation between each contact specification
and alarm output. When this signal indicates
an alarm has tripped, then inputting an alarm
reset (RS) or turning the power off and then
back on cancels that alarm, and this signal
returns to its normal state.
Contact specifications Power OFF Normal state Alarm state
Normally closed OFF ON OFF
Normally open OFF OFF ON
INP terminal
Related parameters
This signal indicates that positioning or return-
to-origin is complete. Fb-23 : Positioning detection range
FC-02 : Output terminal polarity setting
• This signal turns OFF when return-to-origin signal is input, and return-to-origin then
starts. After return-to-origin is complete, this signal turns ON when the positioning
deviation is within the range specified by "Positioning detection range" (Fb-23).
• This signal is OFF when the servo is OFF.
also be opened when positioning is completed.
5-6
5. Functions
BRK terminal (relay contact) Related parameters

This signal is for controlling an externally
FA-24 : Servo OFF wait time
installed brake.
FA-26 : Brake operation start speed
Use this signal only when the connected robot
has a mechanical brake. No additional wiring FA-27 : Brake operation start time
is required since the connection to the robot FC-02 : Output terminal polarity setting
is made via the input/output connector.
Two methods of brake signal output are
available: output while the motor is stopped
and output while the motor is operating. As
shown in the table below, each setting can be
made to exclude the other setting. Their
output methods are described below.
Note: In the case of the RDP, this signal cannot be used as a relay output since no relay
is mounted on the PC board in the RDP. 5
Parameter (1) Brake signal during stop (2) Brake signal during run
Functions
Servo OFF wait time FA-24 Wait time setting 0
Brake operation start
FA-26 – Start speed
speed
Brake operation start
FA-27 0 Start time
time
This function will not work correctly unless the exclusive setting is made as shown above.
(1) Brake signal while robot is stopped

In this function, after the brake signal (BRK) has turned on, the servo OFF signal can
be delayed in order to counteract delays in the brake operation. So use this signal
when the robot stops such as when stopped after positioning. Using this signal
frequently while the robot is moving will cause abnormal brake wear.
• This signal turns on simultaneously with servo ON operation when a servo-ON
signal is input. This signal immediately turns off when the servo ON signal turns
off. The servo then turns off after a time preset by the "Servo OFF wait time" (FA-24)
parameter has elapsed. (See figure below.)
• The "Servo OFF wait time" (FA-24) can be set from 0 to 1.00 seconds in 10ms steps,
and operation may have a maximum delay of 1ms.
• If an alarm trips then the servo turns off simultaneously with this signal.
also be opened when the brake is released.
• When using this function, set the "Brake operation start time" (FA-27) to 0.
Note: Operation is controlled by pulse train input even during the "Servo OFF wait time".
To stop the operation, turn off the PEN input or stop the pulse train input.
SON Servo ON state Servo OFF wait time
FA-24
Servo status Power being supplied
BRK Brake OFF state
5-7
5. Functions
(2) Brake signal while robot is operating

This function is used when applying the brake while the robot is operating so use in
applications where the robot can slow sufficiently such as when the robot is free-
running. Using this function when moving a heavy payload may cause braking delays,
resulting in dropping hazards so use caution.
• This signal turns on simultaneously with servo ON operation when a servo-ON
signal is input. Also, when the servo turns off or an alarm trips, the brake is applied
when the robot speed falls below the "Brake operation start speed" (FA-26) or after
the "Brake operation start time" (FA-27) has elapsed after the servo turns off. (See
figure below.)
• The "Brake operation start time" (FA-27) can be set from 0 to 1.000 second in 4ms
steps, and operation may have a maximum delay of 1ms.
5 also be opened when the brake is released.
• When using this function, set the "Servo OFF wait time" (FA-24) to 0.
Functions
SON=OFF
or alarm
SON Servo ON state
Servo status Brake operation start time

Power being supplied
FA-27
BRK Brake OFF status
*
Brake operation
start speed
Robot speed FA-26
*Operation condition
FA-26 > | Speed | or FA-27 time has elapsed.
5-8
5. Functions
5.4 Return-to-origin function

(1) Return-to-origin using stroke end method (RDX)
The following table shows the RDX return-to-origin operation using the stroke end
method.
FA-23 Return-to-origin using stroke end method
When "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) = 1 Stroke end

2
(Fb-12)
1 3
Reverse run Forward run

Position 7 6 (4) 5
t-F
2048
Machine reference (d-18)
{L- {[(Fb-35)-1]×4096+2048}}/4096
(Machine reference=100%) 5
Functions
Phase Z 4096
Homing back distance
First Z 2048 counter
L
(Fb-12) When "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) = 2

Stroke end 4
5 6 (Fb-13)
Reverse run 7 Forward run

Position {L- {[(Fb-35)-1]×4096+2048}}/4096
3
(Machine reference=100%) 1
t-r Machine reference (d-18)
2
(Fb-12)
2048
4096 Phase Z
4096 First Z
Homing back distance 2048
counter
[(Fb-35)-1]×4096
L
1. Start return-to-origin.
2. Robot moves towards stroke end at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
3. Reverses movement direction while adjusting speed during acceleration/deceleration time
(Fb-04, Fb-05) when the robot has reached the stroke end, which is determined by detecting (in
first part of this step) a motor current exceeding the rated current and then the specified
Operation sequence
"Stroke-end current" (Fb-36). (Note 1)

4. Moves in direction opposite the stroke end at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12). Starts counting
the Homing back distance from the stroke end. (If the "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) is set
to 1, then step 4 is skipped and goes to step 5.)
5. When the Homing back distance count exceeds "[(Fb-35) – 1] × 4096" pulses, the robot starts
slowing down during deceleration time (Fb-05) and moves at slow return-to-origin speed
(Fb-13). (Note 1)
6. Continues moving at slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13).
7. Stops at first "phase Z" position after the Homing back distance count has exceeded
"[(Fb-35) – 1] × 4096+2048" pulses.
(Machine reference is displayed on d-18, which is calculated as follows:
{ L (distance from stroke end to stop point)–{[(Fb-35) – 1]× 4096+2048}} / 4096)
Note 1: The acceleration/deceleration time parameters specify the time needed to accelerate or decelerate
between 0 and maximum speed.
5-9
5. Functions
(2) Return-to-origin using sensor method (RDX)

The following table shows the RDX return-to-origin operation using the sensor
method.
ORL terminal at start of return-to-origin using sensor method
FA-23
OFF ON
Sensor
Sensor
4096 pulses (machine reference=100%) (ORL) 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%) (ORL)

2 Machine reference (d-18)
3
(Fb-12) 5
(Fb-12)×0.5
S-F 1 (Fb-13) 4 6 (Fb-13)
5 4
Reverse run A Forward run
1 Position
(Note 3)
(Note 3) A Position 3 7
5 First phase Z
Phase Z
(Fb-12)×0.5 2 First phase Z
Phase Z
Functions
Sensor Sensor
(ORL)
4096 pulses (machine reference=100%)(ORL) 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%)
Machine reference (d-18) (Fb-12)×0.5 2
A
Reverse run 5 A Forward run 1
Reverse run (Note 3)
3
Forward run
S-r (Note 3) Position Position
(Fb-13) 4 7
1 6 5 (Fb-12)×0.5
3
(Fb-12)×0.5 2
4
First phase Z First phase Z
Phase Z Phase Z
1. Start return-to-origin. 1. Start return-to-origin.

2. Robot moves towards origin at return-to-origin 2. Robot moves away from origin at 50% of
speed (Fb-12). return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
3. Slows down during deceleration time (Fb-05) 3. Reverses movement direction when sensor (ORL
Operation sequence
when sensor (ORL terminal) turns on. (Note 5) terminal) turns off. (Deceleration/acceleration time
4. Continues moving at slow return-to-origin speed is determined by parameters (Fb-05, Fb-04). (Note 5)
(Fb-13). 4. Moves back towards origin at 50% of return-to-
5. Stops at first "phase Z" position after reaching origin speed (Fb-12). (Note 4)
the slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13). (Machine 5. Slows down during deceleration time (Fb-05)
reference displayed on d-18.) (Note 3) when sensor (ORL terminal) turns on. (Note 5)
6. Continues moving at slow return-to-origin speed
(Fb-13).
7. Stops at first "phase Z" position after reaching
the slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13). (Machine
reference displayed on d-18.) (Note 3)
Note 1: If the origin sensor (ORL terminal) does not turn off even when the robot has moved a distance of 50,000 pulses
after starting return-to-origin with the origin sensor (ORL terminal) turned on (operation in steps 1 and 2), then an
origin sensor alarm (E80) occurs.
Note 2: If the origin sensor (ORL terminal) does not turn on and the robot comes into contact with the mechanical end
(stroke end), then an overload alarm (E05) occurs.
Note 3: Machine reference is displayed after return-to-origin is completed normally.
Note 4: If the origin sensor (ORL terminal) turns on during acceleration, then the robot immediately slows down and sets
to step 5. (Speed might not always reach 50% of return-to-origin speed (Fb-12) ).
Note 5: Acceleration/deceleration time parameters set the time needed to accelerate or decelerate between 0 and
maximum speed.
5-10
5. Functions
(3) Return-to-origin using stroke end method (RDP)

The following table shows the RDP return-to-origin operation using the stroke end
method.
When phase ZM is between return-to-origin start position and stroke end
Stroke end
When "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) = 2
Phase ZM
2 3
(Fb-12)
1 Reference phase Z

Position
R side
When FA-14
9
8
7
4096
(Fb-13) 4
L side
When FA-14
5
is set to CC 6 5
Functions
(Fb-12) is set to CC
Phase Z [(Fb-35)-1]×4096
(Dotted line indicates
phase ZY.) 1024 pulses 768 (=300H) pulses
(R/D converter) 256(=100H) 768 (=300H) pulses (1.024mm)
4096 4096 d Homing back distance

256(=100H) counter
Machine reference (d-18)=(d+256)/4096

Machine reference=100%
t-F
When return-to-origin start position is between phase ZM is and stroke end
Stroke end When "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) = 1

Phase ZM
8
(Fb-12) 7
R side 2
When FA-14 1 Reference phase Z 9
is set to CC
Position 14 13 12
(Fb-13)
4096 10 (11)
6 1024 or more pulses L side
5 4 When FA-14
(Fb-12) is set to CC
Phase Z 1024 pulses 768 (=300H) pulses
(Dotted line indicates 768 (=300H) pulses 256(=100H) (1.024mm)
phase ZY.)
(R/D converter)
4096 4096 d Homing back distance
256(=100H) counter

5-11
5. Functions
When phase ZM is between return-to-origin start position and stroke end
Stroke end
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
5 6
(Fb-12)
R side [(Fb-35)-1]×4096 L side
When FA-14 6 When FA-14
is set to CC is set to CC
7
(Fb-13)
Reverse run 4 4096 9 Forward run
Position 8
1
5 256(=100H)
3
1024 pulses
(1.024mm)
2
(Fb-12)
Phase Z
(Dotted line indicates
768 (=300H) pulses 768(=300H) phase ZY.)
Functions
(R/D converter)
d 4096 4096
Homing back 768(=300H)
distance counter
t-r
When return-to-origin start position is between phase ZM and stroke end
Stroke end
Phase ZM
1024 or more pulses
4 5
(Fb-12)
Reference phase Z
R side L side
When FA-14 When FA-14
is set to CC 10 (11) 12 is set to CC
(Fb-13)
Reverse run 4096 14 Forward run
Position 13
9 3 1 6
2
7
(Fb-12)
8
Phase Z
256(=100H) 1024 pulses (Dotted line indicates
768 (=300H) pulses 768(=300H) (1.024mm)
phase ZY.)
(R/D converter)
d 4096 4096
Homing back 768(=300H)
distance counter
5-12
5. Functions
Return-to-origin using stroke end method

FA-23 When phase ZM is between return-to-origin start When return-to-origin start position is between
position and stroke end phase ZM is and stroke end
1. Start return-to-origin. 1. Start return-to-origin.
2. Robot moves towards stroke end at return-to-origin 2. Robot moves towards stroke end at return-to-origin
speed (Fb-12). speed (Fb-12).
3. Continues moving towards the stroke end at return- 3. Reverses movement direction while adjusting speed
to-origin speed (Fb-12). during acceleration/deceleration time (Fb-04, Fb-05)
Starts counting "Homing back distance" after when robot has reached the stroke end, which is
detecting the sensor signal (phase ZM). determined by detecting (in first part of this step) a
Among phase Z at each 4096 count, the phase Z motor current that exceeded the rated current and
detected at a point closest to the stroke end is then the specified stroke-end current (Fb-36). (Note 1)
regarded as reference phase Z. 4. Moves in direction opposite the stroke end at return-
4. Reverses movement direction while adjusting speed to-origin speed (Fb-12).
during acceleration/deceleration time (Fb-04, Fb-05) 5. Moves a distance of 1024 pulses after detecting the
when robot has reached the stroke end, which is sensor signal (phase ZM).
determined by detecting (in first part of this step) a 6. Reverses movement direction while adjusting speed
motor current that exceeded the rated current and
then the specified stroke-end current.
5. Moves in direction opposite the stroke end at return-
to-origin speed (Fb-12).
during deceleration time (Fb-05) after checking that
at least 1024 pulses have elapsed. (Note 1)
7. Moves towards the stroke end after changing speed
back to the return-to-origin speed (Fb-12) during
5
Functions
6. Continues moving in direction opposite the stroke end acceleration time (Fb-04).
until reaching the position "[(Fb-35)–1] × 4096]" 8. Continues moving towards the stroke end at return-
pulses away from the reference phase Z. to-origin speed (Fb-12). Starts counting the "Homing
(If "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) is set to 1, then back distance" after detecting the sensor signal
step 6 is skipped and goes to step 7.) (phase ZM).
Operation sequence
7. Moves at slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13) after Among phase Z at each 4096 count, the phase Z
adjusting speed during deceleration time (Fb-05). (Note 1) detected at a point closest to the stroke end is
8. Temporarily stops at a position 4096 pulses away regarded as reference phase Z.
from phase Z at the deceleration point. 9. Reverses movement direction while adjusting speed
9. Further moves a distance equal to the following phase during acceleration/deceleration time (Fb-04, Fb-05)
difference between phase Z Y and phase Z, and then when the robot has reached the stroke end, which
stops there. is determined by detecting (in first part of this step)
When moving to L: 256=100H pulses a motor current that exceeded the rated current, and
When moving to R: 768=300H pulses then the specified stroke-end current.
Machine reference is displayed on d-18, which is 10. Moves in direction opposite the stroke end at return-
calculated as follows: to-origin speed (Fb-12).
When moving to L: (d-18)=(d+768)/4096 11. Continues moving in direction opposite the stroke
When moving to R: (d-18)=(d+256)/4096 end until reaching the position "[(Fb-35)–1] × 4096]"
pulses away from the reference phase Z.
(If "Homing back distance" (Fb-35) is set to 1, then
step 11 is skipped and goes to step 12.)
12. Moves at slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13) after
adjusting speed during deceleration time
(Fb-05). (Note 1)
13. Temporarily stops at a position 4096 pulses away
from phase Z at the deceleration point.
14. Further moves a distance equal to the following
phase difference between phase Z Y and phase Z,
and then stops there.
When moving to L: 256=100H pulses
When moving to R: 768=300H pulses
Machine reference is displayed on d-18, which is
calculated as follows:
When moving to L: (d-18)=(d+768)/4096
When moving to R: (d-18)=(d+256)/4096
Note 1: The acceleration/deceleration time parameters specify the time needed to accelerate or decelerate between 0 and
maximum speed.
Note 2: There are two phase Z types as described below. Be careful not to confuse them.
Phase ZM : Phase Z signal that is input from the mechanical section via ENC. (This sensor signal is output
from two points at both ends of the mechanical stroke.)
Phase ZM Phase ZM
One each of phase ZM is
PHASER series present near both ends of robot.
Phase Z (R/D converter) : Phase Z signal that is output from the resolver or R/D converter. (This is output every 1024 pulses.)
Also note that the ORL terminal is left unconnected when performing the RDP return-to-origin operation using the stroke end method.
Note 3: Phase Z Y is a position offset 768(=300H) pulses from the phase Z (R/D converter) signal.
Machine reference corresponds to the distance between the stroke end and phase Z Y as shown in the operation sequence diagram.
Note 4: The magnetic pole position is determined when phase ZM is passed.
5-13
5. Functions
(4) Return-to-origin using sensor method (RDP)

The following table shows the RDP return-to-origin operation using the sensor method.
FA-23 Return-to-origin using sensor method
When phase ZM is between return-to-origin start position and origin sensor
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
2 3
(Fb-12)
4
1
5 7
(Fb-13)
5 Reverse run
Position
R side
6
Forward run
L side
When FA-14
When FA-14 d is set to CC
Functions
is set to CC 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%) 256 (=100H) pulses

Phase Z
(Dotted line indicates phase ZY.) 1024 pulses
(R/D converter) 256(=100H) (1.024mm) 768 (=300H) pulses
4096
When return-to-origin start position is between phase ZM is and origin sensor

S-F
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
8 9
(Fb-12)
10
2
7 1 11 13
(Fb-13)
Reverse run 3 12 Forward run
Position
4
6
(Fb-12) 5
L side
R side Machine reference (d-18) When FA-14
When FA-14 is set to CC
is set to CC d
1024 pulses 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%) 256 (=100H) pulses
Phase Z
(R/D converter) 256 (=100H) (1.024mm) 768 (=300H) pulses
4096
5-14
5. Functions
When origin sensor is ON when starting return-to-origin
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
10 11
(Fb-12)
12
9 13
(Fb-13)
5
Position
S-F 3 1
5
(Fb-12)×0.5
8 6 2
7 L side
(Fb-12) When FA-14
Machine reference (d-18) is set to CC
Functions
R side
When FA-14 d
is set to CC 1024 pulses 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%) 256 (=100H) pulses
Phase Z
4096
Operating direction FA-14

(as viewed from cable
carrier side of robot) CC C
Forward run Slider moves to L side Slider moves to R side
Reverse run Slider moves to R side Slider moves to L side
5-15
5. Functions
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z

Position 7 6 L side
(Fb-13) When FA-14
5 1 is set to CC
R side 4 3 2
When FA-14 (Fb-12)
is set to CC Machine reference (d-18)
5 768 (=300H) pulses

Phase Z
d
4096 pulses (machine reference=100%)

Functions
4096

S-r
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
5
6

Position 13 12 L side
3
(Fb-13) 1 When FA-14
11 7 is set to CC
R side 10 2
When FA-14 8
(Fb-12)
is set to CC Machine reference (d-18) 9
d
768 (=300H) pulses 1024 pulses
Phase Z 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%)
4096
5-16
5. Functions
Origin sensor (ORL)
Phase ZM
Reference phase Z
6 7
2 8
(Fb-12)×0.5
Position 14 L side
S-r (Fb-13) 5 4 When FA-14
13 is set to CC
R side
When FA-14
is set to CC
12
11 10
9
(Fb-12) 5
Functions
d
768 (=300H) pulses 1024 pulses
Phase Z 4096 pulses (machine reference=100%)
256(=100H) (1.024mm) 768 (=300H) pulses
(R/D converter)
4096
Operating direction FA-14

(as viewed from cable
carrier side of robot) CC C
Forward run Slider moves to L side Slider moves to R side
Reverse run Slider moves to R side Slider moves to L side
5-17
5. Functions

2. Robot moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
3. Continues moving at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12). Starts detecting phase Z at each 4096
count after detecting the sensor (phase ZM) signal.
At this point, phase Z just before detecting the sensor (phase ZM) signal is regarded as
reference phase Z which is the start point to detect phase Z at each 4096 count.
4. Slows down during deceleration time (Fb-05) after detecting that the origin sensor (ORL
terminal) has turned on. (Note 2)
5. Moves at slow return-to-origin speed (Fb-13).
6. After detecting the origin sensor signal, the robot temporarily stops at first "phase Z" position
detected at each 4096 count.
5 7. Further moves a distance equal to the phase difference between phase Z Y and phase Z, and
then stops there.
Functions
Machine reference is displayed on d-18, which is calculated as follows:

Operation sequence
2. Robot moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
4. Reverses movement direction after the motor has stopped, and speeds up during
acceleration time (Fb-04).
5. Moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12) until 1024 pulses have elapsed after detecting the
sensor (phase ZM) signal.
6. Slows down during deceleration time (Fb-05).
8. Moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
13. Further moves a distance equal to the phase difference between phase Z Y and phase Z, and
then stops there.
5-18
5. Functions

2. Robot moves at 50% of return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
terminal) has turned off. (Note 2)
acceleration time (Fb-04). Then moves at 50% of return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
acceleration time (Fb-04). Then moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
7. Continue moving at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12) until 1024 pulses have elapsed after
5
Operation sequence
detecting the sensor (phase ZM) signal.

8. Slows down during deceleration time (Fb-05).
Functions
10. Moves at return-to-origin speed (Fb-12).
15. Further moves a distance equal to the phase difference between phase Z Y and phase Z, and
then stops there.
Note 1: The acceleration/deceleration time parameters specify the time needed to accelerate or decelerate
between 0 and maximum speed.
Note 2: If the origin sensor (ORL terminal) does not turn on and the robot comes into contact with the
mechanical end (stroke end), then an overload alarm (E05) occurs.
Note 3: There are two phase Z types as described below. Be careful not to confuse them.
Phase ZM : Phase Z signal that is input from the mechanical section via ENC. (This sensor
signal is output from two points at both ends of the mechanical stroke.)
Phase ZM Phase ZM
One each of phase
PHASER series ZM is present near
both ends of robot.
Phase Z (R/D converter) : Phase Z signal that is output from the resolver or R/D converter. (This is
output every 1024 pulses.)
Note 4: Phase Z Y is a position offset 768(=300H) pulses from the phase Z (R/D converter) signal.
Note 5: Connect the origin sensor to the ORL terminal.
Note 6: If the origin sensor (ORL terminal) does not turn off even when the robot has moved a distance of
50,000 pulses after starting return-to-origin with the origin sensor (ORL terminal) turned on, then an
origin sensor alarm (E80) occurs.
Note 7: The magnetic pole position is determined when phase ZM is passed.
5-19
5. Functions
5.5 Analog output function

The robot driver has 2 channels provided with analog monitor output terminals. The
output voltage is from 0 to ±3.0V. The speed detection value (nFb), torque command
value (tqr), speed command value (nrF), speed deviation (nEr), position deviation (PEr),
current value (iFb), command pulse frequency (PFq), and regenerative braking resistor
duty ratio (brd) can be selected with parameters (FC-30, FC-33) on the monitor terminals
AO1, AO2 (common L terminal) for the 2 channels. The monitor output gain can be set
in FC-32 and FC-35. The positive/negative polarity output (0 to ±3.0V) or the absolute
value output (0 to ±3.0V) can be selected with FC-31 and FC-34.
Analog monitor output function
5 Setting Data name

Maximum monitor output value
(3.0V output value) (Note 1)
Monitor output 1, 2
gain setting range (%)
(FC-32)(FC-35)
nFb Speed detection value Maximum speed
Functions
tqr Torque command value Maximum torque

nrF Speed command value Maximum speed
nEr Speed deviation Maximum speed
0 to 3000.0
PEr Position deviation 5 rotations of motor (Default: 100%)
iFb Current value Maximum current
PFq Command pulse frequency Maximum speed
Regenerative braking Alarm level
brd
resistor duty ratio (FA-08)
Note 1: Monitor output is 3.0V as in the above table when the monitor output gain is 100%.
Note 2: Output signal accuracy is within ±10%.
Note 3: Set the monitor output data for an output of 0 to ±3.0V, or 0 to 3.0V in FC-31 and FC-34.
However, "PFq" and "brd" are only positive outputs.
nFb, tqr, nrF, nEr,

PEr, iFb, PFq, brd
±10%
200.0%
3.0V
100.0%
1.5 50.0%
−(Maximum value) 0
+ (Maximum value)
-1.5
-3.0
Gain setting for monitor outputs 1, 2

(FC-32), (FC-35)
5-20
5. Functions
5.6 Pulse train input function

(1) Position pulse train input
The pulse train signals (PLS, SIG) for the position command are valid in position
control mode. Position commands from this signal are counted only when the pulse
train input enable signal (PEN) is ON. There are 6 position command count modes as
shown in the table below and these are set by the parameter (FA-11).
FA-11 Signal name Pulse train input
PLS terminal 1
(Pulse train command) 0
P-S Pulse train
(Default) command SIG terminal
ON : Forward run 1
Forward run
5
Reverse run
OFF: Reverse run 0
PLS terminal 1
(Forward run
Functions
Forward/ 0
side command) Forward run
F-r Reverse run 1
pulse SIG terminal
(Reverse run 0
side command) Reverse run
PLS terminal 1
(Phase difference 0
Phase two-phase, phase A)
difference 1
A-b SIG terminal
two-phase (Phase difference 0
pulse two-phase, phase B) Forward run Reverse run
[ * Count is multiplied by 4.]
PLS terminal 1
Reverse (Pulse train command) 0
-P-S pulse train SIG terminal
command ON : Forward run 1
OFF: Reverse run Forward run Reverse run
0
PLS terminal 1
(Reverse run 0
Reverse/ side command) Reverse run
r-F Forward run 1
pulse SIG terminal
(Forward run 0
side command) Forward run
PLS terminal 1
Reverse (Phase difference 0
phase two-phase, phase B)
b-A difference SIG terminal 1
two-phase (Phase difference 0
pulse two-phase, phase A) Reverse run Forward run
[ * Count is multiplied by 4.]
5-21
5. Functions
The "Command pulse filter time constant" (FC-19) parameter for the pulse train input
circuit hardware can be selected by the command pulse frequency.
Command pulse filter
Filter time constant Recommended command
time constant
(μs) pulse frequency
FC-19
Lo 1 Less than 200k pulses/s
Hi (default setting) 0.2 More than 200k pulses/s
Note: When using phase difference two-phase pulse (A, B phase input), the
recommended input frequency is 1/4 of the frequency value in the above
table.
(2) Electronic gear
5 Position commands input by pulse train signals are processed in the electronic gear
and become the position command value. This electronic gear multiples the input
command value by (FA-12/FA-13) to form the position command value. That relation
Functions
is shown in the following formula.

(Electronic gear numerator FA-12)
(Position command value) = s (Pulse train input)
(Electronic gear denominator FA-13)
The pulse train input is summarized in the following figure.
PLS Position
Pulse train command
Electronic
SIG input circuit gear
Input form FA-12
FA-11
FA-13
Note: The FLIP-X series resolution is 16384 pulses per revolution of the motor.
The PHASER series resolution is 1 pulse per micrometer.
5-22
5. Functions
[Calculation examples of electronic gear ratio]

1. To move the MR16 (PHASER series) robot at a speed of 2000 millimeters per
second [mm/s] with input pulses at a frequency of 500kpps:
Here, by setting the resolution [mm/pulse] as a, the input frequency [pps] as P, the
movement speed [mm/s] as V, and the electronic gear ratio as G (=FA-12/FA-13), V
can then be expressed as follows.
V = G × (P × a) (1)
Since the PHASER series resolution is 1µm and since a=0.001 [mm/pulse] then by
applying formula (1) we obtain:
G=4
So setting an electronic gear ratio of FA-12 : FA-13 = 4 : 1 allows robot movement

at a speed of 2000 [mm/s]. 5
Functions
2. To move the F14-20 (FLIP-X series) robot a distance of 1 µm per pulse:
Here, by setting the resolution [mm/pulse] as a, the lead length [mm/rev] as L, and
pulses per motor revolution [pulses/rev] as n, and the electronic gear ratio as
G (=FA-12/FA-13), the resolution a can then be expressed as follows.
a=L/n (2)
To move the robot 0.001mm per pulse, an electronic gear ratio G that satisfies the
following relation is needed.
0.001 = G × a (3)
On the F14-20 robot, L=20 [mm/rev] and n=16384 [pulses/rev], so by applying

formulas (2) and (3) we obtain:
G = 16384 / 20000
So setting an electronic gear ratio of FA-12 : FA-13 = 16384 : 20000 allows robot
movement at 1µm per pulse.
Note 1: When the position pulse train signal type is phase difference 2-phase pulse,
the electronic gear ratio should be calculated using the input frequency
multiplied by 4.
Note 2: Do not set a frequency or electronic gear ratio that exceeds the maximum
robot speed.
Note 3: Operation cannot be guaranteed when the electronic gear is set to an extreme
value. Make sure that the setting (FA-12/FA-13) is in a range from 1/20 to 50.
5-23
5. Functions
5.7 Smoothing function

(1) Position command filter
The command pulse rate may cause vibrations when used in combination with a
low-rigidity machine. To prevent this vibration, a filter is added to the position
command so that commands can be changed smoothly.
The filter time constant can be set by parameter (Fd-36). Setting the parameter to 0
disables this function.
Default
Parameter Function name Description
setting
Inserting a filter makes the
Position command
Fd-36 position command run smoothly. 0
filter time constant
5 0 to 60000ms, 0 = Invalid
This function is only valid during position control. The control block is shown below.
Functions
1 + Position
Position Speed
command 1+Tds control command
Current position
Inserting a filter makes the position command run smoothly as shown in the figure
below and vibration can be prevented.
Before filter
insertion
After filter
insertion
Note 1: In position control mode, always set Fd-36 to 0 during unlimited feed in
one way direction, or during synchronous operation of units such as the
conveyor in one way direction. Unless Fd-36 is set to 0, a position
deviation error (E83) will occur.
5-24
5. Functions
5.8 Position sensor monitor function

The position sensor monitor signals OA and OB, which are obtained by dividing the
position sensor "phase A" and "phase B" signals, are output as a line driver output.
The "phase Z" signal is directly output as OZ as a line driver output and an open
collector output.
The position sensor monitor signal is processed by a pulse divider whose division ratio
M/N can be set by the "Position sensor monitor resolution M, N" (FC-09), (FC-10). The
division ratio can be 1/N (N=1 to 64), 2/N (N=3 to 64) or M/8192 (M=1 to 8191). (Note
3) If the division ratio M/N is set in an invalid combination, then no position sensor
monitor signal is output and a mismatch error (E40) occurs. The OZ signal of phase Z is
not divided here. On the FLIP-X series, 1 pulse is output per 1/4 of revolution. On the
PHASER series, an output occurs when the robot passes through phase ZM near both
ends of the robot.
The "phase Z" signal of the position sensor transits the internal circuits within the robot
driver and is output as is (unchanged). Regarding the phase difference between the OA
and OB signals of phase A and phase B and the direction the robot moves, phase B leads
5
Functions
phase A (default setting) during forward run. But this can be changed by setting the
parameter (FC-11) so that phase A leads phase B.
Position sensor
Phase Z monitor OZ
Phase A Phase OA
Pulse
direction
Phase B divider decision
OB
circuit
M N
FC-09 Phase
direction
FC-10 FC-11
M/N setting range

Position sensor monitor
M N Invalid combination
division ratio
FC-09 FC-10
(Note 1)
1 1 to 64 1/N FC-10 = 65 to 8192
(Note 1)
2 3 to 64 2/N FC-10 = 1, 2, 65 to 8192
(Note 1) FC-09 = 8192
1 to 8191 8192 M/8192
FC-10 = 1 to 8191
Note 1: The position sensor monitor division ratio is M/8192 in the case of FC-10 = 8192.
When FC-10 is not 8192 then the position monitor sensor division ratio to set to
1/N or 2/N according to the FC-09 setting.
Note 2: If FC-09, FC-10 or FC-11 was changed then turn the control power supply off and
then back on again. The correct waveform is not output unless the power is turned
off and then back on.
Note 3: The position sensor monitor output signals OAP, OAN, OBP, OBN, OZP, OZN
and OZ are not available for about 3 seconds after the control power supply is
turned on. If monitoring from a master control device then start monitoring from
about 3 seconds after turning on the control power supply.
The logic output for each signal is as follows.
Current path of line driver output Open collector output
Logic
(OAP, OAN, OBP, OBN, OZP, OZN) Transistor operation (OZ)
1 OAP → OAN OBP → OBN OZP → OZN ON (closed)
0 OAP ← OAN OBP ← OBN OZP ← OZN OFF (open)
5-25
5. Functions
5.9 Adjusting the control gain

This section describes the method for adjusting the control gain required when adjusting
the servo system.
Adjusting the control gain is not required when setting the parameters by following the
description in 6.3.3, "Reference graph for setting the acceleration and position control
cut-off frequency".
If a higher motion response is needed, set the parameters according to the methods for
adjusting the control gain explained below.
Main parameter constants you need to adjust are as follows.

• Mover mass (Fd-00)
• Speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-01)
5 • Position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09)
The block diagram for the servo system is shown below.

Functions
Position control Mover Speed control

cut-off frequency mass cut-off frequency
(Fd-09) (Fd-00) (Fd-01)
Setting
Position + Position + Speed + Current Power Robot

command control control control converter
Current feedback loop

Speed feedback loop
Position feedback loop Detector
5.9.1 Basic rules of gain adjustment

(1) The servo system is made of 3 loops consisting of a position control loop, a speed
control loop, and a current control loop. The internal loop process and the response
(cut-off frequency) must be set to a high level. You need to adjust the position control
loop gain and the speed control loop gain. The current control gain has sufficient
response so no adjustment is needed.
(2) The position control loop and the speed control loop require making a setting that
yields a balanced response. Basically, set the loop gain in a range that holds the
relation: "Position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-09) is lower than "Speed control
cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
As a general guide when making this setting, the "Position control cut-off frequency"
(Fd-09) should be less than 1/6th of the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
(3) The mechanical system might sometimes oscillate if the response of the position
control loop is set to a high value. The gain cannot be set any higher than this so use
caution. Usually, the response of the position control loop cannot be set higher than
the characteristic oscillation frequency of the mechanical system. Set a loop gain that
matches the rigidity and strength of the mechanical system. Setting the response and
the rigidity of the mechanical system is described next.
5-26
5. Functions
5.9.2 Setting the mechanical rigidity and response

Set the response of the servo system according to the rigidity and strength of the machine
connected to the robot. Setting the speed/position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09,
Fd-01) to a high value shortens the response and settling time to a command, but if set
too high, vibration may occur if the rigidity of the mechanical system is low. So set the
speed/position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09, Fd-01) to operate within a stable range.
A general guide for setting response according to the rigidity of the mechanical system is
given in the following table.
Please note that the values are for a general guide only. Oscillation might occur even in
these ranges, so use caution.
Rigidity of Recommended control cut-off frequency
mechanical Applicable machines [Hz]
system
Low
Belt-driven or chain-driven machines
Position (Fd-09)
1 to 5
Speed (Fd-01)
6 to 30
5
• Conveyors or carrier machines
Functions
Machines driven by ball screw
through gear
Medium 5 to 10 30 to 60
• General machine tools
• Robots
Machines directly connected to ball
screw
High 10 or more 60 or more
• Pick & place machines
• Bonding machines
Specific steps for adjusting the speed/position control loop are described next.
5-27
5. Functions
5.9.3 Adjusting the position control loop

(1) Parameter constants used for position control
Parameter constants used for position control are described below.
(a) Position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09)

This parameter constant determines the response of the position control loop.
Setting Fd-09 to a high value improves the response and shortens the positioning
time.
Note 1: Robot might oscillate if the Fd-09 setting is too large.
5 (b) Speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-01)

This parameter constant determines the response of the speed control loop. Set it
within a range where no mechanical vibration occurs. Setting to a high value
Functions
improves the response. If the "Mover mass" (Fd-00) of the mechanical system
(including robot) was set correctly, then the speed control cut-off frequency is
largely equivalent to the value set in Fd-01.
(c) Speed PI control proportional gain (Fd-02)

The speed PI control proportional gain is automatically determined according to
the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01). However, fine adjustments to the
speed PI control proportional gain can be made by setting Fd-02.
(d) Speed PI control integral gain (Fd-03)

The speed PI control integral gain is automatically determined according to the
"Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01). However, fine adjustments to the speed
PI control integral gain can be made by setting Fd-03.
Note 1: Robot might oscillate if the Fd-03 setting is too large.
(2) Adjustment method

1. Set the "Position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-09) somewhat low, and set the
"Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01) in a range where no abnormal noise or
oscillation occurs.
2. Set the "Position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-09) to a large value in a range where
overshoot and vibrations do not occur. As a general guide, set to 1/6th or less of the
"Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
3. Lastly, fine-adjust the "Speed PI control proportional gain" (Fd-02) and "Speed PI
control integral gain" (Fd-03) while monitoring the settling characteristics and
movement, and search for the optimal point.
5-28
5. Functions
5.10 Offline auto-tuning function

The auto-tuning function is described here.
Offline auto-tuning is a function for automatically adjusting the servo system gain
according to the speed control cutoff frequency.
Offline auto-tuning operates the robot at a pre-determined operating pattern, estimates

the mover mass, and correctly sets the "Mover mass" (Fd-00) parameter. The control gain
is then automatically set from the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01) that
determines the response of the speed control loop.
Note 1: It is not necessary to use this function when setting the parameters by following
the description in 6.3.3, "Reference graph for setting the acceleration and
position control cut-off frequency".
Note 2: To use the auto-tuning function, connect the robot to the equipment, and
operate it at the same load as when actually used. The servo system is optimally
5
Functions
adjusted for that load.
Note 3: During auto-tuning, the control mode for the speed control loop must be set to
"Speed PI control". (Cannot be correctly tuned under IP control.)
Note 4: Moment of inertia may not be estimated correctly, depending on the robot
model and operating conditions (load, etc.).
Note 5: During offline auto-tuning, information such as speed settings and torque data
can be checked as graphics on the user PC by using the TOP software for RD
series. So using the TOP software is recommended.
Note 6: When a PHASER series robot is used, magnetic pole position estimation must be
performed before this operation. For information on magnetic pole position
estimation,refer to section 5.17, "Magnetic pole position estimation action".
5.10.1 Offline auto-tuning method

(1) Parameter constants used in offline auto-tuning
Parameter constants used at this time are described below.
(a) Auto-tuning mode (FA-10)
This parameter constant permits you to run auto-tuning. To run auto-tuning, set it
to "oFL".
(b) Speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-01)
This parameter constant sets the response of the speed control loop. Set it within a
range where oscillation does not occur in the mechanical system. Setting this value
higher improves the response.
Note 1: In the case of a large load, the robot might oscillate unless the Fd-01
parameter is set small.
5-29
5. Functions
(2) Offline auto-tuning operation

1. Turning on the FOT and ROT terminals, and then turning on the SON terminal
starts the auto-tuning. The LED indicator on the robot driver shows "Auto".
2. The robot accelerates and decelerates while moving in both the forward and reverse
directions at tuning run speed, centering around the point where auto-tuning
started. This movement is 1 cycle and is repeated to a maximum of 10 cycles. (See
figure below.) The default setting for the tuning run speed is 1000 [min -1]. This
setting can be changed on the TOP software for RD series.
3. Depending on the load condition, the acceleration/deceleration time might be
changed or the operation might terminate before 10 cycles are completed.
4. When auto-tuning ends, the estimated mover mass is written into Fd-00. If auto-
tuning ends correctly, then the LED indicator on the robot driver shows "End".
5. After auto-turning is complete, turn the RS terminal on and then off, to exit auto-
5 tuning mode.
Speed
Functions
Positive
0 Time
Negative
1 cycle
Maximum 10 cycles
Operation pattern during off-line auto-tuning
Note 1: This function cannot be used unless the following conditions are met.
• The acceleration/deceleration torque must be 10% or more of the rated
torque.
• Machine must have high rigidity including the robot and coupling.
• Must have little backlash from gears, etc.
• Must be a task where there are no safety problems even if oscillation occurs
and there is no damage to equipment.
• Auto-tuning can be used with a machine whose mover mass for the load is
less than 20 times the robot unit. If the mover mass of the machine is more
than 20 times then adjust the gain manually.
(See sections 5.9.1 to 5.9.3 in this chapter for information on manual
adjustments.)
• If the tuning speed was set to a low value then set it to a large value within
a range that will not damage the machine.
• Establish an ample drive range in both the forward and reverse directions.
The drive range during turning is shown next.
5-30
5. Functions
Calculating the robot axis rotation during offline auto-tuning

If the tuning speed is Va [min -1] and the accel/decel time is Δt [s], then the robot axis
rotation, S, can be calculated by the following formula.
S= 3·Va ×$t Calculated example of robot axis rotation

60 during offline auto-tuning
Calculated examples are shown in the Robot axis

Tuning speed Accel/decel rotation S
following table. Set an ample drive range for Va [min -1] time Δt [s] [rotation]
the values in the table. 0.05 1.25
500
The tuning speed and accel/decel time differ 0.1 2.5
depending on whether operated by the digital 0.05 2.5
1000
operator or using the TOP software as shown 0.1 5.0
next. 1500 0.05 3.75
0.1 7.5
Tuning speed and accel/decel time for off-line auto-tuning 5
Tuning speed Va (min ) -1
Accel/decel time Δt(s)
Functions
Digital operator 1000 (fixed) 0.05 (fixed)
TOP software Adjustable Adjustable
Note: The accel/decel time during offline auto-tuning is the time required to reach
the tuning speed from 0 or slow down to 0 from the tuning speed.
(3) Offline auto-tuning sequence

1. To run offline auto-tuning, select "offline auto-tuning" (oFL) on the "Auto-tuning"
(FA-10) parameter, and after writing the value, turn the servo on.
Select "auto-tuning (oFL)"
and write the value.
(FA-10)
Tuning starts. (Auto)
End
Auto-tuning ends (End) Error occurred (Err)
(a) When auto-tuning ends normally:

The estimated momentum of inertia is written in Fd-00.
(b) When an auto-tuning error occurs:

If any of the following events occurred, then a tuning error results.
• An error/abnormality occurred
• The SON terminal turned off during tuning.
• Resonance or similar phenomenon occurred so auto-tuning could not be
performed correctly.
5-31
5. Functions
2. When tuning ends, turn the SON terminal off, and turn the RS terminal on and then
off, to exit the auto-tuning mode.
Note 1: The tuning might not end normally if the accel/decel torque is less than 10 [%]
of the rated torque. If that happens, use the TOP software for RD series to set
the default value 0.05[s] for the accel/decel time to a smaller value.
Also, if a tuning error occurred, then each gain value returns to the value
prior to tuning. No alarm will trip unless there is an abnormal condition, so
be aware of the need for safety especially during resonance.
Note 2: If you did not turn the RS terminal on and then off in step 2 above after
turning ended, then set the "Auto-tuning mode" (FA-10) to "non".
5.10.2 Offline auto-tuning using the TOP software

5 The TOP (software for RD series) allows you to run fully automatic offline auto-tuning or
Functions
run one at a time while checking each result. A brief description is given below. For
detailed information, refer to the TOP software user's manual.
The following parameter settings are required for auto-tuning.

(a) Cut-off frequency setting
Set the cut-off frequency for controlling the speed during auto-tuning. Set a
value that will not cause hunting.
Note 1: In the case of a large load, the robot might cause hunting unless this
parameter is set small.
(b) Initial value of tuning mover mass

Set the mover mass at start of auto-tuning. Tuning will end quickly if setting this
to a value that you know will roughly match the mover mass. If you do not
know this value then leave the setting as is. The auto-tuning function will
estimate the mover mass.
(c) Tuning speed

Enter the speed to use for auto-tuning. Enter a speed that will not damage the
machine connected to the robot. If the speed is low then the tuning may fail.
Set it to a higher speed at a level that will not damage the machine.
(d) Accel/decel time

Set an initial value for accel/decel time for pattern operation during auto-
tuning.Set this value to a small value if the accel/decel torque is less than 10%
of the rated torque. (Refer to the torque data shown on the display during
pattern operation.)
(1) Procedure for fully automatic offline auto-tuning

1. Click the [Test run and Adjustment] button on the opening screen.
Click the [Offline tuning] tab on the screen that appears.
2. Set the parameters that are required for auto-tuning.
5-32
5. Functions
3. Click the [Continuous pattern tuning start] button.
4. Check safety conditions and then turn on the FOT and ROT terminals, and turn on
the SON terminal. This starts continuous pattern operation and estimates the mover
mass.
5. After estimating the mover mass, the pattern operation waveforms are downloaded
from the robot driver and displayed.
6. After tuning ends, turn the SON terminal off, and turn the RS terminal on and then
Note 1: This function automatically rewrites the "Mover mass" (Fd-00) parameter.
Note 2: When tuning is interrupted before it is complete, turn the SON terminal off,
and turn the RS terminal on and then off, to exit the auto-tuning mode.
Note 3: If the auto-tuning failed, then see the notes in 5.10.1.
5
Functions
(2) Procedure for offline auto-tuning while checking the result each time
1. Click the [Test run and Adjustment] button on the opening screen.
Click the [Offline tuning] tab on the screen that appears.
2. Set the parameters that are required for auto-tuning.
3. Click the [1 pattern tuning start] button.
4. Check safety conditions and then turn on the FOT and ROT terminals, and turn on
the SON terminal. This starts 1-pattern operation and estimates the mover mass.
5. After estimating the mover mass, the pattern operation waveforms are downloaded
from the robot driver and displayed.
6. Check if the waveform is satisfactory and click the [1-pattern tuning start] button
again if necessary. This runs the 1-pattern operation and estimates the mover mass.
Repeat this to perform tuning while checking one waveform at a time.
7. After tuning ends, turn the SON terminal off, and turn the RS terminal on and then
Note 1: This function automatically rewrites the "Mover mass" (Fd-00) parameter.
Note 2: When tuning is interrupted before it is complete, turn the SON terminal off,
and turn the RS terminal on and then off, to exit the auto-tuning mode.
5-33
5. Functions
5.11 Gain change function

The gain change function is a function for changing the position and speed control gain
during operation and is used in the following cases.
• To raise the control gain during servo-lock but to lower the gain to reduce noise
during run.
• To raise the control gain during settling to shorten the settling time.
5.11.1 Changing the control gain

A block diagram of the gain change function is shown below.
5 Fd-09
Position control
cut-off Fd-33 Fd-01
frequency
Functions
Position gain Speed control

change time cut-off
Fd-32 constant frequency
Second position
control cut-off
frequency
Position Speed Torque

error command command
Position + Position + Speed
Robot
command control control
Speed
Position Detector
Gain Switching signal

change
Fd-31
Fd-30 Position
error width
Gain change for gain
mode change
No gain change • non
Auto change • AUto FC-40
Input terminal
function
5-34
5. Functions
(1) Parameter constants used for the gain change function

The parameter constants used for changing the gain are explained below.
(a) Speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-01)

Set the response (cutoff frequency) of the speed control system. This is always
enabled.
(b) Position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09)

Set the response (cut-off frequency) of the position control system. This is always
enabled.
(c) Gain change mode (Fd-30)

Set whether or not to use the gain change mode.
5
• When using "non":
Functions
The cut-ff frequency of the position control section is equal to the "Position control
cut-off frequency" (Fd-09), and the cut-off frequency for the speed control section is
equal to the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
• When using "AUto":
If the position deviation is larger than the "Position error width for gain change" (Fd-31),
then the cut-ff frequency of the position control section is equal to the "Position control
cut-off frequency" (Fd-09), and the cut-off frequency for the speed control section is
equal to the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
If the position deviation is smaller than the "Position error width for gain change" (Fd-31),
then the cut-ff frequency of the position control section is equal to the "Second position
control cut-off frequency" (Fd-32), and the cut-off frequency for the speed control
section is equal to the "Second speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-34).
(d) Position error width for gain change (Fd-31)

Set the "position deviation" where you want to start the gain change.
(e) Second position control cut-off frequency (Fd-32)

Set the position control cut-off frequency to use after gain change.
(f) Position gain change time constant (Fd-33)

Set the filter time constant for gain variations during gain change (Fd-09 ⇔ Fd-32).
(g) Second speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-34)

Set the speed control cut-off frequency to use after gain change.
(h) Speed gain change time constant (Fd-35)

Sets the filter time constant for gain variations during gain change (Fd-01 ⇔ Fd-34).
5-35
5. Functions
(2) Procedure for setting the gain change function

1. Set the "Gain change mode" (Fd-30) to "AUto".
• Set the "Position error width for gain change" (Fd-31).
• The position control gain is changed based on the interrelation of "Position error
monitor" (d-09) and "Position error width for gain change" (Fd-31).
2. Set the "Second position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-32) and the "Second speed
control cut-off frequency" (Fd-34).
Default values are:
• The default value for the "Second position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-32) is
double the value (10.00 [Hz]) of the "Position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-09).
• The default value for the "Second speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-34) is
5 double the value (60.00 [Hz]) of the "Speed control cut-off frequency" (Fd-01).
• As a general guide set the Fd-32 to 1/6th or less of Fd-34.
Functions
3. After making the settings in 1 and 2 above, turn the servo on.
Note 1: A large gain difference during the gain change might cause mechanical shocks
to the machine. If that happens, set the "Position gain change time constant"
(Fd-33) and "Speed gain change time constant" (Fd-35) to a large value (the
default value is set to 1 [ms]).
Note 2: If abnormal noise and oscillation occur during servo-lock, then set the
"Second position control cut-off frequency" (Fd-32) and the "Second speed
control cut-off frequency" (Fd-34) to a value low enough so that abnormal
noise and oscillation do not occur.
5-36
5. Functions
5.12 Clearing the alarm log and setting the default values
The tripped alarm log can be cleared and all parameter data can be initialized.
Note: Data initialization alone does not reset the robot parameters to their default
values. To reset the robot parameters to their default values, generation is
required after data initialization. For details on generation, refer to the TOP
software user's manual.
The procedure for this resetting is shown below. If the parameter data has deviated from
the expected value due, for example, by an entry error, then you can clear the alarm log
with the procedure given below or return the parameter to the default value (default
value in the robot driver).
(1) When initializing from the digital operator

5
Functions
1. Select initializing mode.
1-1 Open FA-98, and select one of the following items according to the initializing
information.
Clear Trip Log : CH
Factory Setting : dAtA
Clear Position Sensor to Zero : AbS
1-2 Press the SET key.

(Display changes to FA-98)
(See Chapter 6, "Parameter description", for information on how to set.)
2. Press the key for at least 2 seconds while simultaneously holding down the
key.
3. While holding down the above arrow keys, press and release the SET key.
The initializing now starts and the following table appears on the display panel.
Initializing information LED display
Alarm log clear HC
Data initializing JP
Note: Do not shut down the control power for the robot driver during
initialization.
Shutting off the power while data is being written may destroy the EEPROM
data (stored data) within the robot driver, and the robot driver may fail to
operate correctly.
4. After the display panel returns to d-00, turn the control power supply off and then
back on.
Note: After initializing the parameters, always perform generation before

operating the robot.
If the robot is operated in the initialized state, it might malfunction or be
damaged.
5-37
5. Functions
(2) When initializing with the TOP software on the PC

All parameters can be reset to their default values (default values in the robot driver)
by using the tool bar or the pull-down menu on the TOP software screen.
Start up the TOP software to make connection with the robot driver.
1. Click on the toolbar on the parameter setup screen.

(You can also use the pull-down menu.)
2. The "Initialization setup" screen then appears as shown below. In the "Initialization
mode" drop-down list select the item you want to initialize.
The following items can be selected in the "Initialization mode" drop-down list.
Trip history clear: Clears only the tripped alarm log.
5 Data initialization: Clears only the parameter data.

Functions
3. Click the [Initialization start] button. Initializing then begins.

During initializing, the LED indicator on the robot driver shows:
"HC" → during alarm log clear
"JP" → during data initialization
Note: Do not shut down the control power for the robot driver during
initialization.
Shutting off the power while data is being written may destroy the EEPROM
data (stored data) within the robot driver, and the robot driver may fail to
operate correctly.
4. After initializing, the data is automatically loaded into the PC from the robot driver,
and the initializing then ends.
5. After initializing the parameter data, perform generation.
Note: After initializing the parameters, you must perform generation before
operating the robot.
If the robot is operated in the initialized state, it might malfunction or be
damaged.
5-38
5. Functions
5.13 Motor rotating direction
5.13.1 FLIP-X series phase sequence

The forward direction when the RDX is used in combination with the FLIP-X series robot
is shown in the table below. The rotating direction for the robot can be set to the reverse
direction by changing the "Motor revolution direction" (FA-14) parameter.
FA-14
Rotation
CC C
Forward run CCW CW
Functions
Reverse run CW CCW
5.13.2 PHASER series phase sequence

The forward direction when the RDP is used in combination with the PHASER series
robot is shown in the table below. The movement direction for the robot can be set to
the reverse direction by changing the "Motor revolution direction" (FA-14) parameter.
Operating FA-14
direction CC C
Motor forward direction Motor forward direction
Slider movement direction Slider movement direction
Forward run L side R side L side R side
Motor forward direction Motor forward direction

Slider movement direction Slider movement direction
Reverse run L side R side L side R side
Note1: The above figures are viewed from the cable carrier side of the robot.
5-39
5. Functions
5.14 Speed limit function

Speed can be limited by the parameters (Fb-20, Fb-21) as shown in the table below.
Speed limit mode Speed limit value

Setting
FA-20 Forward Reverse
Fixed value by
non Fb-20 Fb-21
parameter setting
5
Functions
5-40
5. Functions
5.15 Fast positioning function

The fast positioning function shortens the positioning settling time to the minimum time,
and drastically reduces the positioning deviation that occurs during positioning
operation.
Note: The Moment of inertia (Fd-00) parameter must be set correctly to use this function.
The parameter constants used with this function are described below.
(a) Fast positioning mode (Fd-40)

This parameter specifies how to control the fast positioning. To perform positioning in
the shortest settling time, set this parameter to "FAst" from "non" or "FoL". To perform
positioning while drastically reducing position deviations, use the position deviation
minimizing control by setting this parameter to "FoL". The control operation for each
setting is described below.
5
Functions
• Minimizing the positioning settling time "FAst"
When the fast positioning mode is set to "FAst" from "non" or "FoL", the control
constant parameters are automatically optimized to minimize the positioning
settling time. If the fast positioning mode is already set to "FAst", then set it to "non"
and then back to "FAst" again. Always be sure to first make the other control
parameters (Fd-xx) before setting to "FAst". Making this setting automatically sets
the "Position feed forward gain" (Fd-10) and the "Position feed forward filter time
constant" (Fd-41).
Position overshoot might occur depending on the machine being operated. If that
happens, adjust the "Position feed forward gain" (Fd-10) that was automatically set,
to a new setting where position overshoot does not occur.
• Minimizing the position deviation "FoL"

Setting the fast positioning mode to "FoL" enables the position deviation minimizing
control to work. Position deviation or error which may occur can be adjusted by
the "Position error filter gain" (Fd-42). (See figure below.)
Position error Position error filter gain

(pulses) (Fd-42) = 0 [%]
(Fd-42) = 20 [%]
(Fd-42) = 50 [%]
(Fd-42) = 80 [%]
(Fd-42) = 100 [%]

0 Time [s]
Effects of position deviation minimizing control (Fd-40 = FoL) during positioning operation
5-41
5. Functions
5.16 Notch filter function

The notch filter function reduces the vibration originating from the machine resonance,
by lowering the gain at a particular frequency. The parameter constants used in this
function are described below. Set these parameters using the TOP software's machine
system diagnosis function. See the TOP software user's manual for more information on
the machine system diagnosis function.
(a) Notch filter 1 frequency (Fd-12)

This is the first notch filter. Set the frequency where you want to lower the gain.
(b) Notch filter 1 bandwidth (Fd-13)
5 Set the gain attenuation rate for the notch filter 1. Setting this parameter to 0
disables the notch filter 1.
Functions
(c) Notch filter 2 frequency (Fd-14)

This is the second notch filter. Set the frequency where you want to lower the gain.
(d) Notch filter 2 bandwidth (Fd-15)

Set the gain attenuation rate for the notch filter 2. Setting this parameter to 0
disables the notch filter 2.
■ Machine system diagnosis function on TOP software
5-42
5. Functions
5.17 Magnetic pole position estimation action

On the RDP, magnetic pole position estimation must be performed after power is turned
on when operating a robot in pulse train mode. To perform magnetic pole position
estimation, set FA90 (Hall sensor connection) to oFF2, and follow the sequence shown
below in "Magnetic pole position estimation and terminal states".
The SRD terminal turns "OFF" during magnetic pole estimation, but turns "ON" when the
magnetic pole estimation ends correctly. Also, when magnetic pole estimation ended
correctly, the normal servo-ON state returns, and the servo operates according to the
commands that are input.
To determine the magnetic pole position after magnetic pole position estimation is
complete, perform return-to-origin. For detailed information on return-to-origin, see
section 5.4, "Return-to-origin function".
Note: To perform magnetic pole position estimation, set FA-90 (Hall sensor connection)
5
to oFF2. Do not set FA-90 to oFF.
Functions
■ Magnetic pole position estimation and terminal states
ON
SON terminal OFF
ON
SRD terminal OFF
ON
FOT/SRD terminal OFF 10 [ms] or more No particular instructions
Robot operation Magnetic pole

Servo-off position estimation Normal servo-on Servo-off Normal servo-on
First servo-on (magnetic pole Second and subsequent servo-on

position estimation) after power-on after power-on
Note 1: The magnetic pole position estimation operation relies on speed command
values generated internally in the robot driver so if command values such as
position command pulses are input from outside the robot driver, then the
robot might suddenly start to operate immediately after the magnetic pole
position estimation ends.
So do not enter command values such as position command pulses from
outside the robot driver during magnetic pole position estimation.
Note 2: If the magnetic pole position estimation ends in an error, then a magnetic
pole position estimation error (E95) occurs.
Note 3: The RDP shipped after October 2008 issues an error E95 (magnetic pole
position estimation error) when magnetic pole position estimation starts
unless both FOT and ROT terminals are ON. The RDP shipped before then
does not issue an error, but fails to estimate the magnetic pole position.
5-43
5. Functions
5.18 Magnetic pole position estimation and parameters

The magnetic pole position estimation is performed by repeatedly generating the speed
patterns automatically within the robot driver, as shown below. The number of repeating
cycles automatically generated in one magnetic pole position estimation ranges from 6 to
13 cycles. (The number of repeating cycles may change according to the robot status.)
If failed to estimate the magnetic pole position correctly, a maximum of 4 retries are
automatically attempted to estimate the magnetic pole position.
Speed
[mm/s]
Fb-40
Fb-41
Fb-43 Twait
5 0
Fb-43
Fb-41
Fb-42
Time [s]
Functions
–Fb-40
1 cycle
6 to 13 cycles (to a maximum of 4 retries)
* Twait (wait time)

The wait time Twait [s] for 1 operation pattern cycle is shown in the formula below.
The wait time Twait [s] under two conditions: (1) Fb-42 [s] ≥ Tstop [s], and
(2) Fb-42 [s] < Tstop [s], are shown below.
= Fb-42 [s] (1) Fb-42 [s] r Tstop [s]
Twait [s]
= Tstop [s] (2) Fb-42 [s] < Tstop [s]
Tstop [s]: This is the time in seconds for the speed detection
value of 0 [mm/s] in the robot driver, to converge to
the range of the "Zero speed detection value" (Fb-22) .
<Wait time Twait state (relation between speed command value, speed detection value
within robot driver and wait time Twait [s]>
(1) Fb-42[s] r Tstop[s] (2) Fb-42[s] < Tstop[s]
(Twait = Fb-24) (Twait = Tstop)
Speed [mm/s] Speed [mm/s]

Twait(=Fb-42) Twait(=Tstop)
Tstop Fb-42
0 Time [s] 0 Time [s]
-Fb-22 -Fb-22
Speed detection Speed detection

value within robot driver value within robot driver
Speed command Speed command
value within robot driver value within robot driver
5-44
5. Functions
The distance the motor or slider moves during magnetic pole position estimation can be
derived by the following formula.
Movement distance [mm] = Fb-40 ×(Fb-41 + Fb-43) / 1000
Example: Distance moved with Fb-40=80, Fb-41=10, and Fb-43=10

Movement distance [mm] = 80 ×(10 + 10) / 1000 = 1.6 [mm]
[Mover mass and speed control cut-off frequency for magnetic pole position estimation]
Use Fd-46 (Mover mass for pole position estimation) to set the mover mass for
magnetic pole position estimation. Likewise, use Fd-47 (Speed control cut-off
frequency for pole position estimation) to set the speed control cut-off frequency.
Also use Fd-48 (Gain change time constant after pole position estimation) to set the
time constant of the first-order lag filter for gain switching when shifting to normal
control after estimating the magnetic pole position.
5
Functions
SON
SRD
Mover mass Fd-46

Fd-00
Speed control
cut-off frequency Fd-47
Fd-01 (Fd-34)
Magnetic pole position Fd-48 × 5

estimation operation or more
Note 1: Fd-46, Fd-47 and Fd-48 cannot be set for RDP that was shipped initially. Use
Fd-00 and Fd-01 to set the mover mass and speed control cut-off frequency for
magnetic pole position estimation and normal control operation.
Note 2: These parameters can be set with the dedicated software TOP (Ver. 6.5.1 or
later). If using an earlier version of TOP, set them from the front panel.
<To shorten the distance moved during magnetic pole position estimation>
Setting the parameters as shown below in (1) through (3) shortens the distance moved
during magnetic pole position estimation.
(1) Set Fb-42 (Pole position estimation wait time) to approximately 300 [ms].
(2) Set as follows to reduce the movement distance.
• Fb-41 (Pole position estimation ACC/DEC time) = 10 [ms]
• Fb-43 (Pole position estimation constant-speed time) = 0 [ms]
(3) To decrease the movement distance, adjust Fb-40 (Pole position estimation speed)
to a small value.
5-45
5. Functions
Note 1: Magnetic pole position estimation might sometimes be unable to accurately

estimate the magnetic pole position due to how the torque is generated during
the magnetic pole position estimation period.
Note 2: If an abnormal movement occurs, adjust the Fd-46, Fd-47 and/or Fd-48
parameters.
Note 3: Depending on the robot load conditions, magnetic pole position estimation may
fail with an error E95 (magnetic pole position estimation error). If this happens,
adjust the pole position estimation parameter to an appropriate value.
Note 4: The center position of the magnetic pole position estimation operation may
shift, depending on the start position.
Note 5: After magnetic pole position estimation is complete, the magnetic pole position
is determined when phase ZM is passed.
5
Functions
5-46
Chapter 6 Parameter description
This chapter describes part names of the digital operator integrated into this product and how to
operate it. This chapter also describes monitor mode and setup parameters.
Contents
6.1 Digital operator part names and operation 6-1

6.1.1 Part names of digital operator 6-1
6.1.2 Operating the digital operator 6-2
6.2 Function lists 6-5
6.2.1 List of monitor functions 6-6
6.2.2 List of setup parameters 6-7
6.3 Function description 6-12
6.3.1 Monitor display description 6-12
6.3.2 Setup parameter description 6-15
6.3.3 Reference graph for setting the acceleration
and position control cut-off frequency 6-32
■ RDX.................................................................... 6-33
T4H-2 (C4H-2) ..............................................................6-33
T4H-2-BK (C4H-2-BK)....................................................6-33
T4H-6 (C4H-6) ..............................................................6-34
T4H-6-BK (C4H-6-BK)....................................................6-34
T4H-12 (C4H-12) ..........................................................6-35
T4H-12-BK (C4H-12-BK) ................................................6-35
T5H-6 (C5H-6) ..............................................................6-36
T5H-6-BK (C5H-6-BK)....................................................6-36
T5H-12 (C5H-12) ..........................................................6-37
T5H-12-BK (C5H-12-BK) ................................................6-37
T5H-20 .........................................................................6-38
T6-6 (C6-6) ..................................................................6-38
T6-6-BK (C6-6-BK) ........................................................6-39
T6-12 (C6-12)...............................................................6-39
T6-12-BK (C6-12-BK) ....................................................6-40
T6-20 ............................................................................6-40
T7-12 ............................................................................6-41
T7-12-BK ......................................................................6-41
T9-5 .............................................................................6-42
T9-5-BK ........................................................................6-42
T9-10 ............................................................................6-43
T9-10-BK ......................................................................6-43
T9-20 ............................................................................6-44
T9-20-BK ......................................................................6-44
T9-30 ............................................................................6-45
T9H-5 ...........................................................................6-45
T9H-5-BK ......................................................................6-46
T9H-10 .........................................................................6-46
T9H-10-BK ....................................................................6-47
T9H-20 .........................................................................6-47
T9H-20-BK ....................................................................6-48
T9H-30 .........................................................................6-48
F8-6 (C8-6) ..................................................................6-49
F8-6-BK (C8-6-BK) ........................................................6-49
F8-12 (C8-12) ..............................................................6-50
F8-12-BK (C8-12-BK) ....................................................6-50
F8-20 (C8-20) ..............................................................6-51
F8L-5 (C8L-5) ...............................................................6-51
F8L-5-BK (C8L-5-BK) .....................................................6-52
F8L-10 (C8L-10) ...........................................................6-52
F8L-10-BK (C8L-10-BK) .................................................6-53
F8L-20 (C8L-20) ...........................................................6-53
F8L-20-BK (C8L-20-BK) .................................................6-54
F8L-30 ..........................................................................6-54
F8LH-5 (C8LH-5) ..........................................................6-55
F8LH-10 (C8LH-10) .......................................................6-55
F8LH-20 (C8LH-20) .......................................................6-56
F10-5 (C10-5) ..............................................................6-56
F10-5-BK (C10-5-BK) ....................................................6-57
F10-10 (C10-10) ...........................................................6-57
F10-10-BK (C10-10-BK) ................................................6-58
F10-20 (C10-20) ...........................................................6-58
F10-20-BK (C10-20-BK) ................................................6-59
F10-30 .........................................................................6-59
F14-5 (C14-5) ..............................................................6-60
F14-5-BK (C14-5-BK) ....................................................6-60
F14-10 (C14-10) ...........................................................6-61
F14-10-BK (C14-10-BK) ................................................6-61
F14-20 (C14-20) ...........................................................6-62
F14-20-BK (C14-20-BK) ................................................6-62
F14-30 .........................................................................6-63
F14H-5 (C14H-5) ..........................................................6-63
F14H-5-BK (C14H-5-BK) ................................................6-64
F14H-10 (C14H-10) ......................................................6-64
F14H-10-BK (C14H-10-BK) ............................................6-65
F14H-20 (C14H-20) ......................................................6-65
F14H-20-BK (C14H-20-BK) ............................................6-66
F14H-30 .......................................................................6-66
F17L-50 (C17L-50) .......................................................6-67
F17L-50-BK (C17L-50-BK) .............................................6-67
F17-10 (C17-10) ...........................................................6-68
F17-10-BK (C17-10-BK) ................................................6-68
F17-20 (C17-20) ...........................................................6-69
F17-20-BK (C17-20-BK) ................................................6-69
F17-40 .........................................................................6-70
F20-10-BK (C20-10-BK) ................................................6-70
F20-20 (C20-20) ...........................................................6-71
F20-20-BK (C20-20-BK) ................................................6-71
F20-40 .........................................................................6-72
F20N-20 .......................................................................6-72
N15-10 .........................................................................6-73
N15-20 .........................................................................6-73
N15-30 .........................................................................6-74
N18-20 .........................................................................6-74
B10 ..............................................................................6-75
B14 ..............................................................................6-75
B14H ............................................................................6-76
R5 ................................................................................6-76
R10 ..............................................................................6-77
R20 ..............................................................................6-77
■ RDP .................................................................... 6-78
MR12 ...........................................................................6-78
MR16 ...........................................................................6-78
MR16H .........................................................................6-79
MR20 ...........................................................................6-79
MR25 ...........................................................................6-80
MF7 .............................................................................6-80
MF15 ...........................................................................6-81
MF20 ...........................................................................6-81
MF30 ...........................................................................6-82
MF50 ...........................................................................6-82
MF75 ...........................................................................6-83
6.4 Control block diagram and monitors 6-84

6. Parameter description
6.1 Digital operator part names and operation
6.1.1 Part names of digital operator

The RD series is operated from the built-in digital operator.
Monitor indicator
(5-digit LED)
Down key
FUNC
Function key
SET
Shift key
CHARGE
6
Parameter description
Charge lamp
Up key Save key
Name Description
Monitor indicator Displays a monitor value or set value.
Charge lamp Lights up when charge in DC bus capacitor exceeds 30V.
FUNC Function key Enters the monitor mode or parameter setting mode.
Moves the indicating digit or setting digit to the left.
Shift key Pressing this key at the leftmost digit moves the selected
position to the rightmost digit.
Up key Changes the monitor number, setup parameter number,

Down key or parameter setting.
SET Save key Saves parameter setting.
6-1
6.1.2 Operating the digital operator

(1) Changing the monitor mode display and parameter setting
The button marks over/under the right/left arrows ( ) or at the side of the up/down
arrows ( ) show that those buttons were pressed. To save data you have entered
always be sure to press the SET key. Pressing the FUNC key will not save the data but
retains the previous value.
FUNC
FUNC SET
When the SET key is pressed in monitor mode (d-xx), the parameter
data displayed at that time will automatically appear the next time
power is turned on. This setting can be cancelled by setting another
parameter in monitor mode or by clearing the alarm log.
Blinking
6 FUNC FUNC
Note 1)
FUNC FUNC
SET
Note 3)
Blinking Blinking
FUNC FUNC
Note 2)
FUNC SET
Note 3)
FUNC
FUNC
FUNC
s3
Blinking
To enter a negative value, place the cursor at the leftmost
Note 5)
digit and change the polarity by pressing the or
key. If the data is 0 at this point, it is not set to "–0" but to
the maximum negative value (–5000).
Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3
Note 1: When the FUNC key in hierarchy 1 is held down, the hierarchy changes in
order, from hierarchy 2 → hierarchy 3 → hierarchy 2 → hierarchy 1. The
parameter name displayed after pressing the FUNC key at FA--- (hierarchy 1)
will be the parameter name that was last displayed at hierarchy 3 (if up to
hierarchy 3 was displayed).
Note 2: The blinking digit indicates the current cursor position.
Note 3: Pressing the SET key saves the data you have entered.
Pressing the FUNC key cancels the data you have entered and retains the
previous value.
Note 4: When changing a parameter (FA-12, FA-13, etc.) from "100" to "001", the
minimum setting range prevents changing it from the higher-order digit to
"000". So, first set it to "101" and then change it to "001".
Note 5: To quickly move from the monitor mode display (d-xx) to the parameter
setting mode (FA to Fd) use the or keys.
6-2
(2) Operating the trip monitor and the trip log monitor
The button marks over/under the right/left arrows ( ) or at the side of the up/down
arrows ( ) show that those buttons were pressed.
FUNC
Note 2) Speed command
Note 2) Speed detection value

FUNC
Current
DC bus voltage
Input terminal
Output terminal 6
Note 1)
FUNC
FUNC
Shows the same

……
information as above "d-11".
This indicates no alarm log is stored.
Note 1: The number at the right of the alarm code shows the alarm log number.
The number "1" is the newest data. The larger the log number the older the
log. For more information refer to 9.1, "Alarm display (alarm log)".
Note 2: A period ( . ) in the last digit indicates the following information.
Period Displayed information Remarks
No Speed command Two speed data items (speed command and
speed detection value) are used and can be
Yes Speed detection value identified by the period on the trip monitor.
6-3
(3) Special display

A special display appears to indicate the robot driver status as shown in the following
table.
Display Description
Voltage is too low during servo-off. (Control power supply)
No alarm log is stored.
User initialization in-progress. (LED segments within the leftmost

digit light in sequence.)
Log initialization in-progress. (LED segments within the leftmost

digit light in sequence.
Sample display: When setting Fb-14, Fb-16 or Fb-18 to a value
6 between –10000 and –19999.

Display at left shows a parameter value of –11491.
(A minus sign "-" is appended to the leftmost digit "1" in order to
indicate a 6-digit number including a sign.)

<To set Fb-14, Fb-16 and Fb-18:>
As the basic method, use the key to select the digit you want
to change and then use the or key to set the desired
value. Note that the leftmost digit is displayed as follows:
Press the SET key when the desired value is displayed.
6-4
6.2 Function lists

This section describes monitor functions and parameters that can be set for the robot
driver. Parameters are divided into several groups as shown in the following table.
Group Description
d-xx Allows checking monitor parameters such as speed and position.
FA-xx Operation mode or protection level parameters
Fb-xx Operation constant parameters
FC-xx Input/output terminal parameters
Fd-xx Control constant parameters such as mover mass and response speed.
"xx" means a parameter number.
Parameters for each group are listed on the following pages.

6
6-5
6.2.1 List of monitor functions

Parameter Units
Parameter name Display range
No. RDX RDP
-1
d-00 Speed command monitor -7000 to 7000 min mm/s
Speed detection value
d-01 -7000 to 7000 min -1 mm/s
monitor
d-02 Output current monitor 0 to 400 %
d-03 Torque command monitor -400 to 400 %
d-04 Output torque monitor -400 to 400 %
ON
d-05 Input terminal monitor OFF
SON
ROT
FOT
ORG
ORL
RS
PEN
CER
TL
6 ON
d-06 Output terminal monitor OFF

BRK
ALM
SRD
INP
Position command 80000000 (negative maximum) to 7FFFFFFF (positive

d-07 pulses
monitor maximum)
80000000 (negative maximum) to 7FFFFFFF (positive
d-08 Present position monitor pulses
maximum)
80000000 (negative maximum) to 7FFFFFFF (positive
d-09 Position error monitor pulses
maximum)
d-10 Output voltage monitor 0 to 400 V
Displays the speed command value, speed detection
value, current value, DC bus voltage, input terminal
d-11 Trip monitor –
information, and output terminal information when a trip
(alarm) occurs.
Displays the past 3 alarm logs except the latest log, which
are stored in memory.
Displays the speed command value, speed detection
d-12 Trip log monitor –
value, current value, DC bus voltage, input terminal
information, and output terminal information when an
alarm has tripped.
Operation control mode
d-13 trq / SPd / PoS –
monitor
d-14 Operation status monitor non / run / trP / Fot / rot / ot –
Detected moment-of-
d-15 "Motor rotor inertia" to "motor rotor inertia × 128" ×10 -4kg·m 2 ×10kg
inertia monitor
Phase Z position monitor
0 to 8192
d-16 (Magnetic pole position pulses
(Maximum value is equal to FC-09.)
counter monitor)
d-17 Do not use. Do not use. –
d-18 Machine reference 0 to 100 %

Regenerative braking
d-32 0 to 100 %
operating ratio monitor
6-6
6.2.2 List of setup parameters

Parameter setting ranges and default values are shown in the following tables.
(1) Operation mode parameters
Default setting Units Change
Parameter Parameter
Setting range during
No. name RDX RDP RDX RDP operation
FA-00 S-P, S-t, P-t,

Control mode P-S – No
(Note 3) P-S, t-S, t-P
Position sensor
FA-01 wire breaking OFF, on on – No
detection
Allowable time of 0.00, 0.05 to
FA-02 0.00 s No
power failure 1.00
Overspeed error
FA-03 0 to 150 110 % No
detection level
6
Speed error 0 to maximum
FA-04 Depends on model min -1 mm/s No
detection value speed
Position error
FA-05 0.0 to 100.0 20.0 rotation No
detection value
FA-07 DC bus power
L123, Pn L123 – No
(Note 3) supply
Regenerative
FA-08 braking 0.0 to 100.0 Depends on model % No
operating ratio
Overload notice
FA-09 20 to 100 80 % No
level
Auto tuning non, oFL, FFt
FA-10 non – No
mode onL1, onL2 (Note 3)
Pulse train input F-r, P-S, A-b

FA-11 F-r – No
mode r-F, -P-S, b-A
Electronic gear
FA-12 1 to 65535 – No
numerator Depends
1
Electronic gear on model
FA-13 1 to 65535 – No
denominator
Motor revolution
FA-14 CC, C Depends on model – No
direction
DB Operation
FA-16 non, trP, SoF SoF – No
selection
FA-17 Torque limit
non, A2, oP non – No
(Note 3) mode
Torque bias non, CnS
FA-18 non – No
mode A2, oP (Note 3)
FA-20 Speed limit

non, A1, oP non – No
(Note 3) mode
Position
FA-22 command PLS, Pro, oP PLS – No
(Note 3)
selection
Note 1: Displayed on RDP only.
Note 2: Invalid on RDP.
Note 3: Do not change the setting.
Note 4: Set this parameter to the default value for each model.
6-7

Parameter Parameter
Setting range during
No. name RDX RDP RDX RDP operation
L-F, L-r, H1-F,
H1-r, H2-F,
FA-23 Homing mode H2-r, CP (Note 3) Depends on model – –
t-F, t-r, S-F, S-r

Servo OFF wait
FA-24 0.00 to 1.00 0.05 s No
time
Operation range
FA-25 at machine 1 to 255 10 rotation No
diagnosis
FA-26 Brake operation 0 to maximum
30 min -1 mm/s No
(Note 2) start speed speed
FA-27 Brake operation 0, 0.004 to
0.000 s No
(Note 2) start time 1.000
FA-28 Electronic
20 to 105 Depends on model % No
6 (Note 4)
FA-80
(Note 3)
thermal level
Position sensor
type selection
inC, AbS inC – No
Stnd, inCE,
FA-81 Position sensor
AbSE1, AbSE2, inCE – No
(Note 3) selection
AbSA2, AbSA4
Depends
FA-82 Position sensor 500 to 65535
4096 on pulses No
(Note 4) resolution (FA-81=inCE)
model
FA-85 Linear scale
0.01 to 655.35 1.00 μm No
(Note 1), (Note 3) accuracy
FA-86 Pole position
8000 to 7FFF 0 – No
(Note 1) offset
FA-87 Linear scale
A, b b – No
(Note 1), (Note 3) polarity
FA-88 Phase angle of
PHASE, LinE PHASE – No
(Note 1), (Note 3) pole position
FA-89 Preset condition
OrLP, OrLn OrLP – No
(Note 1), (Note 3) for pole position
FA-90 Hall sensor oFF2

oFF2 – No
(Note 1) connection oFF, CnCt (Note 3)
Initialization CH, dAtA

FA-98 CH – No
mode selection AbS (Note 3)

Note 2: Invalid on RDP.
Note 4: Set this parameter to the default value for each model.
6-8
(2) Operation constant parameters

Setting range Default setting Units Change
Parameter
Parameter name during
No. RDX RDP RDX RDP RDX RDP operation
Fb-04 Acceleration time 0.00 to 99.99 10.00 s Yes
Fb-05 Deceleration time 0.00 to 99.99 10.00 s Yes
Torque limit value 1 0 to
Fb-07 Depends on model % Yes
(first quadrant) maximum torque
(second quadrant) maximum torque
(third quadrant) maximum torque
(fourth quadrant) maximum torque
Fb-11 Torque bias value ±0 to ±300 0 % Yes
1 to
Fb-12 Homing speed 1 (fast) maximum 1 to 100 60 20 min -1 mm/s Yes
speed
Fb-13
Fb-14
Homing speed 2 (slow)
Homing position offset
value (H)
1 to 999 1 to 20
±0 to ±19999
6
0
5 min -1
pulses
mm/s Yes
Yes
6
Homing position offset
Fb-15 0 to 99999 0 pulses Yes
value (L)
Forward position limit
Fb-16 ±0 to ±19999 0 pulses Yes
value (H)
Forward position limit
value (L)
Reverse position limit
Fb-18 ±0 to ±19999 0 pulses Yes
value (H)
Reverse position limit
value (L)
Forward speed limit
Fb-20 0 to maximum speed Depends on model min -1 mm/s Yes
value
Reverse speed limit
Fb-21 – maximum speed to 0 Depends on model min -1 mm/s Yes
value
Positioning defection
range
Positioning interval 0.00 to 10.00
Fb-24 0.00 s Yes
time limit (in 0.02 steps)
Up to speed detection
Fb-25 0 to 100 10 min -1 mm/s Yes
range
Fb-30 non, SHArP,
S-curve ratio non – Yes
(Note 2) rEGLr, LooSE
Fb-35 Homing back distance 1 to 255 Depends on model – No
Fb-36 Current for striking limit 40 to 100 Depends on model % No
Fb-37 Time for striking limit 0.1 to 2.0 0.2 s No
Fb-40 Pole position estimation
–500 to 500 Depends on model mm/s Yes
(Note 1) speed
10 to 500 Depends on model ms Yes
(Note 1) ACC/ DEC time
0 to 500 100 ms Yes
(Note 1) wait time
0 to 500 Depends on model ms Yes
(Note 1) constant-speed time
Fb-44 Position sensor wire
20 to 100 Depends on model % Yes
(Note 1) breaking detection current
Fb-45 Speed error detection value
0 to maximum speed 500 mm/s No
(Note 1) at pole position estimation

6-9
(3) Input/output terminal parameters

Parameter
Parameter name Setting range during
No. RDX RDP RDX RDP operation
Input terminal
FC-01 0000 to 3FFF 0400 – No
polarity setting
Output terminal
FC-02 0000 to 00FF 0002 – No
polarity setting
Position sensor
FC-09 16 to 8192 1 – No
monitor resolution M
Position sensor
FC-10 1 to 8192 4 1 – No
monitor resolution N
FC-11 Position sensor
A, b b – No
(Note 1) monitor polarity
FC-12 Phase Z output 1PLS, nCunt
1PLS – No
(Note 1) selection ECunt, qFort
6 FC-19
Command pulse
Lo, Hi Hi – No
1200, 2400,
Communication
FC-21 4800, 9600, 19200 bps No
baud rate
19200, 38400
Communication bit
FC-22 7, 8 8 bit No
length
Communication
FC-23 non, odd, EvEn non – No
parity
Communication
FC-24 1, 2 2 – No
stop bit
nrF, nFb, iFb,
Monitor output 1
FC-30 tqr, nEr, PEr, nFb – No
function
PFq, brd
Monitor output 1
FC-31 SiGn, AbS SiGn – No
polarity
Monitor output 1
FC-32 0.0 to 3000.0 100.0 % No
gain
nrF, nFb, iFb,
Monitor output 2
FC-33 tqr, nEr, PEr, tqr – No
function
PFq, brd
Monitor output 2
FC-34 SiGn, AbS SiGn – No
polarity
Monitor output 2
FC-35 0.0 to 3000.0 100.0 % No
gain
Input terminal
FC-40 0 to 3FFF 0 – No
function
FC-70 Debug mode
0 0 – –
(Note 1) selection
6-10
(4) Control constant parameters

Units Change
Parameter Default
Parameter name Setting range during
No. setting RDX RDP operation
"Motor rotor
Moment of inertia (RDX)
Fd-00 inertia" to "motor Depends on model ×10 -4kg·m 2 ×10kg Yes
Mover mass (RDP)
rotor inertia × 128"
Speed control cut-off
Fd-01 0.1 to 500.0 Depends on model Hz Yes
frequency
Speed control
Fd-02 0.01 to 300.00 Depends on model % Yes
proportional gain
Fd-03 Speed control integral gain 0.01 to 300.00 Depends on model % Yes
Fd-04 P-control gain 0.1 to 99.9 Depends on model % Yes
Fd-05 IP-control gain 0.00 to 1.00 Depends on model – Yes
Torque command filter
Fd-06 0.00 to 500.00 Depends on model ms Yes
time constant
Position phase
Fd-07 0.01 to 9.99 Depends on model – Yes
compensating ratio
Fd-08
Position phase
compensating time
constant
0.1 to 999.9 Depends on model ms Yes 6
Position control cut-
off frequency
Fd-10 Position feed forward gain 0.00 to 1.00 Depends on model – Yes
Notch filter 1
frequency
Notch filter 1
Fd-13 0 to 40 Depends on model dB Yes
bandwidth
Notch filter 2
frequency
Notch filter 2
Fd-15 0 to 40 Depends on model dB Yes
bandwidth
Speed command filter
Fd-20 0 to 60000 Depends on model ms Yes
time constant
non, AUto
Fd-30 Gain change mode Depends on model – Yes
GCH (Note 2)
Position error width
Fd-31 0 to 65535 Depends on model pulses Yes
for gain change
Second position
Fd-32 control cut-off 0.01 to 99.99 Depends on model Hz Yes
frequency
Position gain change
time constant
Position command
Fd-36 0 to 60000 Depends on model ms Yes
Fd-40 Fast positioning mode non, FASt, FoL Depends on model – Yes
Position feed forward
Fd-42 Position error filter gain 0 to 100 Depends on model % Yes
Fd-44 Speed feedback filter
0.00 to 500.00 Depends on model ms No
(Note 1) time constant
Fd-46 Mover mass for pole "Robot mass" to Depends on model ×10kg No
(Note 1) position estimation "robot mass × 128"
Speed control cut-
Fd-47 off frequency for pole 0.1 to 500.0 Depends on model Hz No
(Note 1)
position estimation
Gain change time
Fd-48 constant after pole 0.0 to 500.0 Depends on model ms No
(Note 1)
position estimation
6-11
6.3 Function description
6.3.1 Monitor display description

To automatically display a parameter setting when power is on, display the monitor for
that parameter and press the SET key. This allows setting that parameter to appear when
power is turned on next time. This setting is cancelled when you clear the alarm log.
Monitor
Monitor name Display range Description
No.
–7000 to 7000
Speed command Displays the signed speed command value
d-00 RDX [min -1]
monitor in 1 min -1 units.
RDP [mm/s]
–7000 to 7000
Speed detection Displays the signed speed detection value
d-01 RDX [min -1]
value monitor in 1 min -1 units.
RDP [mm/s]
Output current
6 d-02
d-03
monitor
Torque command
monitor
0 to 400 [%]
–400 to 400 [%]

Displays the output current in 1% units.
Displays the torque command in 1% units.

Output torque
d-04 –400 to 400 [%] Displays the output torque in 1% units.
monitor
Input terminal
d-05 Displays the input terminal status. (See below.)
monitor
In this example, SON, FOT, ROT and PEN are ON and the others are OFF.
ON Black: ON
OFF White: OFF

ROT
SON
FOT
ORG
CER
ORL
PEN
RS
TL
Output terminal
d-06 Displays the output terminal status. (See below.)
monitor
In this example, OL1 and TLM are OFF, and the others are ON.
ON Black: ON
OFF White: OFF

SRD
INP
BRK
ALM
6-12
Monitor
No.
Displays the position command in
a hexadecimal 32-bit signed (two's
complement) value. Displays the 5 low-order
80000000 (negative maximum)
Position digits immediately after d-07 is opened.
to
d-07 command The display shifts to high-order digits by
7FFFFFFF (positive maximum)
monitor pressing to allow checking high-order
[pulses]
digits.
(A decimal point is placed between high-
order word and low-order word.)
digits immediately after d-08 is opened.
Present position to
d-08 The display shifts to high-order digits by
monitor 7FFFFFFF (positive maximum)
pressing to allow checking high-order
[pulses]
digits.
6
digits immediately after d-09 is opened.
Position error to
d-09 The display shifts to high-order digits by
monitor 7FFFFFFF (positive maximum)
pressing to allow checking high-order
[pulses]
digits.
Output voltage
d-10 0 to 400 [V] Displays the output voltage in 1V units.
monitor
Displays the last alarm, speed command value, speed detection value,
current value, and DC bus voltage. Data is displayed in the following
sequence each time is pressed.
Alarm number : E01-1, etc. (Last digit of -1 indicates the latest
information.)
d-11 Trip monitor Speed command value : −5000 (Contains no period.)
Speed detection value : −5000. (Contains a period.)
Current value : 4.60A
DC bus voltage : 270u
Input terminal information : Complies with d-05 display.
Output terminal information : Complies with d-06 display.
Displays the past 3 alarm logs except the
latest log. Pressing or displays the
alarm number only. Pressing displays
the alarm information.
Alarm number : E01-2, etc. (The larger
the last digit, the older
the log.)
Speed command : −5000 (Contains no period.)
Refer to the example shown
d-12 Trip log monitor value
on the right.
Speed detection : −5000. (Contains a period.)
value
Current value : 4.60A
DC bus voltage : 270u
Input terminal : Complies with d-05 display.
information
Output terminal : Complies with d-06 display.
information
6-13
Monitor
No.
Operation trq (torque control)
d-13 control mode SPd (speed control) Displays the current operation mode.
monitor PoS (position control)
Displays the robot driver operation status as
shown below.
d-14 Terminal status

Remarks
display SON Fot rot
ON ON
non OFF OFF ON Stop status
ON OFF
non (normal stop) Servo ON
run ON ON ON
run (run) status
Operation status trP (error) trP − − − Alarm status
d-14
monitor Fot (forward overtravel)
Forward run
rot (reverse overtravel)
inhibit and
ot (run inhibit stop) Fot ON OFF ON
6 servo ON
status
Reverse run
inhibit and
rot ON ON OFF
servo ON
status
Forward/
ot − OFF OFF reverse run
inhibit
"Motor rotor inertia" to

Detected
"motor rotor inertia × 128" Displays the moment-of-inertia and mover
d-15 moment-of-
RDX [ × 10 −4kg·m 2] mass specified by parameter Fd-00.
inertia monitor
RDP [ × 10 kg]
Displays the position monitor showing the
Phase Z position
0 to 8192 phase Z position. The position of phase Z is
monitor
(Maximum value is equal to set to "monitor display = 0".
d-16 (Magnetic pole
FC-09.) Count increases in the forward run direction
position counter
[pulses] according to the direction set by FA-14. The
monitor)
maximum on this monitor is equal to FC-09.
d-17 Do not use. — Do not use.
Displays the machine reference after return-
Machine 0 to 100
d-18 to-origin is performed using the sensor
reference [%]
method or stroke end method.
Displays the duty ratio of the regenerative
braking resistor in 5 seconds with 100%
being equal to the alarm level (set by
Regenerative FA-08).
braking 0 to 100 Example : When FA-08 is set to 0.5 (%),
d-32
operating ratio [%] an alarm trips if the regenerative
monitor braking resistor works for 25ms
in 5 seconds, (5 × 0.005 = 0.025).
The monitor value shows 100%
at this point.
6-14
6.3.2 Setup parameter description

(1) Operation mode parameters, etc.
Parameter Setting range
Parameter name Description
No. [Default value]
S-P, P-S,S-t,
FA-00 Control mode t-S,t-P, P-t Set this parameter to "P-S (position control)".
[P-S]
Selects whether to make an alarm trip when a position
sensor error occurs (or wire breakage or open circuit fault is
detected).
When this parameter is set to "on", an alarm trips if a
position sensor error (E39) is detected.
When set to "OFF" no alarm will trip even if a position
Position sensor
on, OFF sensor error (E39) occurs.
FA-01 wire breaking
[on] Even when set to "OFF", a position sensor error (E39)
detection
occurs if a counter error is detected by the position sensor.
A position sensor error (E39) also occurs at servo ON if
power has been turned on without the position sensor
6
connected, regardless of this parameter setting.
Set this parameter to "on" in normal operation, and do not
set to "OFF" except in case of emergency.
Sets the allowable time for momentary power outage (main
0.00, 0.05 to 1.00 circuit power supply shut-off, main circuit power supply
Allowable time of
FA-02 (s) open-phase, insufficient main circuit power supply voltage).
power failure
[0.00] When this parameter is set to 0.00, the above momentary
power outage is not detected.
When the detected speed value becomes abnormally high
compared to the maximum speed, an alarm trips as an
0 to 150
Overspeed error overspeed error. This parameter specifies the threshold
FA-03 (%)
detection level level for detecting the overspeed error as a percentage of
[110]
the maximum rotational speed of the robot.
When set to 0, overspeed errors are not detected.
When the speed error (difference between speed command
0 to maximum
value and speed detection value) becomes abnormally
speed *1
Speed error large, an alarm trips as a speed error.
FA-04 RDX (min -1)
detection value This parameter specifies the threshold value for detecting
RDP (mm/s)
the speed error. When set to 0, speed errors are not
[Depends on model]
detected.
When the position error (difference between position
command value and position detection value) becomes
0.0 to 100.0 abnormally large, an alarm trips as a position deviation
Position error
FA-05 (rotations) error.
detection value
[20.0] This parameter specifies the threshold value for detecting
the position error in rotation units. When set to 0.0, no
position deviation errors are detected.
This parameter sets the method for supplying the main
power.
When this parameter is set to "Pn", momentary power
L123 outage is not detected. Set this parameter to "L123".
DC bus power
FA-07 Pn
supply
[L123] Setting Method for supplying main power
Supply 3-phase AC power as the main power
L123
from terminals L1, L2 and L3.
*1: This is the maximum speed of the robot. Check the robot specifications.
6-15
Parameter Parameter Setting range

Description
No. name [Default value]
Use this parameter to set the duty ratio of the
regenerative braking resistor for 5 seconds. An alarm
trips if the regenerative braking time exceeds this
setting. (See table below.)
When set to 0.0, no alarm due to the duty ratio will
trip. Set this parameter value when using an external
braking resistor with overheat protection, which is
different from the external braking resistors available
from YAMAHA as options.
When not connecting an external braking resistor,
set the allowable duty ratio of the internal braking
Regenerative 0.0 to 100.0
resistor shown in the table. When using an optional
FA-08 braking (%)
external braking resistor, set the allowable braking
operating ratio [Depends on model]
frequency value by referring to 10.1, "Options".
Allowable duty ratio of
Robot driver output internal braking resistor
RD*-05, 10 Other than 0.0%
6 3-phase
200V RD*-20,
RDP-25 0.5%
Note: When making the FA-08 setting, always set a

value that matches the internal or external

braking resistance. If the setting is incorrect,
the braking resistor may break down.
20 to 100 If the overload level exceeds the value set in this
Overload notice
FA-09 (%) parameter, then the electronic thermal function
level
[80] outputs an overload warning signal.
Auto-tuning and mechanical system diagnosis are
performed according to the setting of this parameter.
Do not set this parameter to "onL1" and "onL2".
Setting Description
non Does not perform auto-tuning.
Performs offline auto-tuning.
non When servo is turned ON with this parameter
set to "oFL", offline auto-tuning automatically
oFL oFL starts. When auto-tuning is completed, the
Auto tuning onL1 mover mass is automatically set and this
FA-10 parameter is reset to "non".
mode FFt
onL2 Performs mechanical system diagnosis.
When the servo is turned ON with this
[non] parameter set to "FFt", an FFT analysis
is performed by moving the robot in a
vibrational motion, and the transmission
FFt characteristics of the user’s mechanical
system are displayed. After the operation is
completed, this parameter is reset to “non”.
(Make this setting via the TOP software.
Operation will not be correct if this setting is
made only on the robot driver. )
6-16

Description
Use this parameter to select the pulse train position
command signal mode from among the following 6
modes.
Pulse train position command signal
Setting
mode
PLS : Gives the motion amount in the
forward direction in pulse trains.
F-r
SIG : Gives the motion amount in the
reverse direction in pulse trains.
PLS : Gives the motion amount in pulse
trains.
P-S SIG : Set to OFF when moving in the
F-r forward direction or set to ON
P-S when in the reverse direction.
A-b PLS : Input phase A of phase
Pulse train input
FA-11 r-F difference 2-phase signal.
mode
6
-P-S A-b
SIG : Input phase B of phase
b-A difference 2-phase signal.
[F-r]
PLS : Gives the motion amount in the
reverse direction in pulse trains.
r-F
SIG : Gives the motion amount in the
forward direction in pulse trains.
PLS : Give the motion amount in pulse
trains.
-P-S SIG : Set to ON when moving in the
forward direction or set to OFF
when in the reverse direction.
PLS : Input phase B of phase
difference 2-phase signal.
b-A
SIG : Input phase A of phase
difference 2-phase signal.
Electronic gear To input a pulse train position command, set the
FA-12
numerator electronic gear ratio applied to the command value.
The gear ratio is given by (FA-12) / (FA-13). The
1 to 65535 numerator and denominator can be set separately.
RDX The settings must meet the following condition:
[Depends on model] 1/20 ≤ (FA-12) / (FA-13) ≤ 50
Electronic gear RDP The FLIP-X series resolution is 16384 pulses per
FA-13
denominator [1] revolution of the motor, and the PHASER series
resolution is 1 pulse per micrometer. The default
values are set so as to issue a command of 1μm per
pulse.
Use this parameter to change the forward direction of
the motor.
Setting Forward direction of motor
CC The counterclockwise direction as
Motor revolution
FA-14 C CC viewed from the motor output shaft end
direction
[Depends on model] is specified as the forward direction.
The clockwise direction as viewed from
C the motor output shaft end is specified
as the forward direction.
6-17

Description
Set the condition for applying the dynamic brake.
Condition for applying dynamic
Setting
brake
non Does not use the dynamic brake.
Applies the dynamic brake only when
trP
an alarm has tripped.
Applies the dynamic brake when
non SoF the servo ON terminal is turned off
DB Operation trP (including an alarm). (Note 1)
FA-16
selection SoF
[SoF] Note 1: The dynamic brake is for emergency stop.
Do not perform start or stop by turning the
servo ON terminal to ON or OFF. Always
turn the servo off after the robot has
stopped.
Note 2: Regardless of this parameter setting, the
6 dynamic brake is applied when the voltage

of the main circuit power supply becomes
too low while the control power supply is
ON.(RD*-5, 10, and 20)
Sets the input source of the torque limit value and the
torque limit mode. Set this parameter to "non".
non
Torque limit A2 Setting Torque limit mode
FA-17
mode oP Limits the torque according only to the
[non] non 4 quadrant torque limit values (Fb-07 to
Fb-10).
Sets the input source of torque bias value. Do not set
non this parameter to "A2" or "oP".
CnS Setting Torque bias mode
Torque bias
FA-18 A2
mode non Does not use a torque bias.
oP
[non] Applies a bias using the set torque bias
CnS
value (Fb-11).
Sets the input source of speed limit value and the
torque limit mode. Set this parameter to "non".
non
Setting Speed limit mode
Speed limit A1
FA-20 Limits the speed according only to
mode oP
[non] the set forward speed limit value and
non
reverse speed limit value (Fb-20,
Fb-21).
Sets the input source of position command value. Set this
parameter to "PLS".
PLS
Position
Pro Setting Input source of position command
FA-22 command
oP Controls the position with the pulse
selection
[PLS] PLS train command input as the command
value.
6-18

Description
This parameter specifies the homing mode and
return-to-origin direction.
Return-to-origin Return-to-origin
Setting
direction operation
L-F
L-r
H1-F
H1-r Do not change.
H2-F
H2-r
CP
t-F Forward run
Stroke end method
t-r Reverse run
L-F
S-F Forward run
L-r
H1-F
H1-r
S-r Reverse run
Sensor method
When the return-to-origin mode (FA-23) is set

6
H2-F
to "stroke end method" (t-F, t-r), the robot driver
H2-r
FA-23 Homing mode determines whether the robot has reached its stroke
CP
end (mechanical end) as follows:
t-F
When the robot comes into contact with its stroke
t-r
end during return-to-origin operation, the current
S-F
increases. When the current exceeds the rated
S-r
current Ir and the integrated current reaches the
[Depends on model]
current Ia specified by the stroke-end current
parameter (Fb-36) as shown below, the robot driver
determines that the robot has reached its stroke end.
(Fb-36)
( ) ((
¤ Ia 2 - Ir 2 > Imax ×
100
) 2 – lr 2 ) × (Fb-37)
Current Ia: Stroke end
current (Fb-36)
Ir: Rated current
Time
Note: Return-to-origin operation stops and the servo

locks when the ORG terminal is switched from
ON to OFF.
Sets the time from when Servo ON command is
turned off until servo ON status is actually cleared.
Note: This parameter allows the servo to delay
0.00 to 1.00
Servo OFF wait turning off until the specified wait time elapses
FA-24 (s)
time after activating the brake. Set this wait time to
[0.05]
counteract delays in the brake operation. Use
this parameter as needed when stopping the
robot such as after positioning is complete.
Set the allowable rotation range of the robot during
Operation range 1 to 255
mechanical system diagnosis. Mechanical systems
FA-25 at machine (rotations)
are diagnosed in the positive/negative range of the
diagnosis [10]
allowable setting range.
6-19

Description
Brake operation If the speed becomes lower than the set speed after
start speed 0 to maximum
the Servo ON command is turned off or an alarm has
speed
* Valid only for tripped, the brake signal (BRK) activates the brake.
FA-26 RDX (min -1)
robot with If the time set in FA-27 elapses before the speed
RDP (mm/s)
mechanical becomes lower than the set speed, the BRK signal
[30]
brake. also works to activate the brake.
Brake operation Sets the maximum time from when the Servo ON
start time command is turned off or an alarm has tripped until
0, 0.004 to 1.000 the brake signal (BRK) works to activate the brake.
FA-27 * Valid only for (s) The time can be set in 4ms steps. If the speed
robot with [0] becomes lower than the setting in FA-26 after turning
mechanical off the Servo ON command, then the BRK signal
brake. activates the brake, regardless of this setting (FA-27).
Sets the electronic thermal level. Change the thermal
level so that it matches the ambient temperature and
robot operating conditions. When this parameter is
changed, the asymptotic line can be moved in parallel
6 with the operation time as shown below.

Set this parameter to the default value for each
model.
Asymptotic line
20 to 105
Electronic
FA-28 (%)
Operation time (s)
thermal level
[Depends on model] 1000
Rotating
Servo lock
20 105
Torque
inC When an absolute position sensor is used, this

Position sensor
FA-80 AbS parameter specifies the position sensor type. Set this
type selection
[inC] parameter to "inC".
This parameter specifies the position sensor type .
Stnd
Set this parameter to "inCE".
inCE
Note 1: A "Mismatch error (E40)" occurs if this
AbSE1
Position sensor parameter is set incorrectly.
FA-81 AbSE2
selection Note 2: This setting is enabled by turning power off
AbSA2
and then back on.
AbSA4
Note 3: This parameter is not reset by user
[inCE]
initialization.
500 to 65535
(pulses) Sets the number of pulses per rotation of the position
Position sensor RDX sensor.
FA-82
resolution [4096] Set this parameter to the default value for each
RDP model.
[Depends on model]
Linear scale
accuracy 0.01 to 655.35 Sets the machine length equivalent to 1 pulse of
FA-85 (μm) ×4 signal on the linear scale. Set this parameter to
* Valid only for [1.00] "1.00".
RDP.
6-20

Description
Specifies the phase Z distance used as the reference
and zero crossing (rising) for the induced voltage
Pole position of phase U or across U and V. Set this parameter in
offset 8000 to 7FFF signed hexadecimal of 16-bit length. By quantizing
FA-86
* Valid only for [0] this setting, the 180° electrical angle of the linear
RDP. motor will be H'4000 (hexadecimal).
Use FA-88 to set the type of reference voltage (phase
voltage or line voltage).
Sets the phase direction in the forward run of the
Linear scale
linear scale. Set this parameter to "b".
polarity A, b
FA-87
* Valid only for [b] Setting Phase
RDP. b Phase B leads phase A.
Sets whether the phase of magnetic pole position
signal is the same as the phase voltage or line
voltage of the linear motor induced voltage. The
offset specified by parameter FA-86 is relative to this
FA-88
Phase angle of
pole position
* Valid only for
PHASE,
LinE
[PHASE]
parameter setting. Set this parameter to "PHASE".
Setting Phase
6
RDP.
• Magnetic pole position signal has the
same phase as phase voltage.
PHASE
• FA-86 is relative to the induced
voltage of phase U.
Sets the condition for presetting the magnetic pole
position. Set this parameter to "OrLP".
Preset condition
for pole position OrLP,
Setting Preset condition
FA-89 OrLn
* Valid only for [OrLP] Preset at the first phase Z position after
RDP. OrLP the ORL signal is switched from OFF to
ON.
Sets the sequence of magnetic pole position
estimation operation. Use this parameter by setting
to "oFF2".
Setting Description
Hall sensor oFF,
connection CnCt, Starts magnetic pole position estimation
FA-90 only when the SON terminal is first
* Valid only for oFF2 oFF2
[oFF2] switched from OFF to ON after power-
RDP.
on.
Note 1: When set to "oFF2", the RS terminal is
enabled only when resetting an alarm after it
has tripped.
Use this parameter to select whether to clear the
alarm/trip log or to initialize the user data. Do not set
this parameter to "AbS".
CH Setting Description
Initialization dAtA
FA-98 Clears the alarm/trip log.
mode selection AbS
[CH] Cancels the monitor of a specific
CH
parameter (d-xx) that is automatically
displayed at power-on.
dAtA Initializes the user data.
6-21
(2) Operation constant parameters

No. [Default value]
Speed Sets the acceleration/deceleration time to perform

Fb-04
acceleration time 0.00 to 99.99 return-to-origin.
(s) Set the time needed to accelerate from 0 to
[10.00] the maximum motor speed (or time needed to
Speed
Fb-05 decelerate from maximum motor speed to 0).
deceleration time
Sets the torque limit value for each quadrant. Torque

limit values 1, 2, 3, and 4 correspond to the first
Fb-07 Torque limit value 1
quadrant through fourth quadrant. Set an absolute
value for all quadrants. Movement direction is same
for Fb-07 to Fb10.
Torque (Forward direction: CCW)

Fb-08 Torque limit value 2 Second
0 to quadrant First
6 maximum torque
(%)
[Depends on model]
Fb-08 quadrant
Fb-07
Fb-09 Torque limit value 3

Speed
(CCW)
Fb-09
Fb-10 Torque limit value 4 Third Fb-10
quadrant Fourth
quadrant
When setting the torque bias to a fixed value,

±0 to ±300 specify it with this parameter. In this case, FA-18
Fb-11 Torque bias value (%) must be set to "CnS".
[0] Set the bias value in the ratio to the rated torque
defined as 100%.
RDX
1 to maximum
speed *1
Homing speed 1
Fb-12 (min -1) [60] Sets the fast speed to perform return-to-origin.
(Fast)
RDP
1 to 100
(mm/s) [20]
RDX
1 to 999
Homing speed 2 (min -1) [6]
Fb-13 Sets the slow speed to perform return-to-origin.
(Slow) RDP
1 to 20
(mm/s) [5]
±0 to ±19999 *2
Fb-14 (pulses) Sets the offset position to perform return-to-origin.
Offset position [0] Ten-digit data consisting of high-order digits
(H/L) at return-to- specified by Fb-14 and lower-order digits specified
origin (homing) 0 to 99999 by Fb-15 is used to determine the offset position
Fb-15 (pulses) during return-to-origin.
[0]
*2: Methods for displaying and entering these parameter values (–10000 to –19999) differ from other
methods. For the operation method, refer to "(3) Special display" in section 6.1.2, "Operating the digital
operator".
6-22

No. [Default value]
±0 to ±19999 *2 Sets the drive range in the forward (+) direction.
Fb-16 (pulses) Ten-digit data (number of position sensor pulses)
Forward position [0] consisting of high-order digits specified by Fb-16
limit value and lower-order digits specified by Fb-17 is used to
(H/L) 0 to 99999 determine the forward (+) position limit value. No
Fb-17 (pulses) limit is in effect when these parameters are set to 0.
[0] Note: Refer to precautions on Fb-18 and Fb-19.
±0 to ±19999 *2 Sets the drive range in the reverse (–) direction. No

Fb-18 (pulses) limit is in effect when these parameters are set to 0.
Reverse position [0] Note: In the following case, the setting is invalid and
limit value
0 to 99999 the motor operates with no limit.
(H/L)
Fb-19 (pulses) Position limit value (+) ≤ Position limit value (–)
[0] (Fb-16: Fb-17) (Fb-18: Fb-19)
0 to maximum
speed *1
Forward speed
Fb-20 RDX (min -1)
limit value
RDP (mm/s)
[Depends on model]
-maximum speed
Sets the upper speed limit.
6
to 0
Reverse speed
Fb-21 RDX (min -1)
limit value
RDP (mm/s)
[Depends on model]
Sets the threshold value for position deviation
1 to 65535
Positioning (difference between position command value and
Fb-23 (pulses)
detection range position detection value) used to determine whether
[20]
positioning is complete.
Sets the threshold value for the time difference
between position command value and position
0.00 to 10.00 detection value (time required for position detection
Positioning
Fb-24 (s) value to reach the position command value) used to
interval time limit
[0.00] determine whether positioning is complete.
When set to 0.00, no monitoring is performed. This
parameter can be set in 0.02 steps.
0 to 100 Sets the threshold value for the speed deviation
Up to speed RDX (min -1) (difference between speed command value and
Fb-25
detection range RDP (mm/s) speed detection value) used to determine whether
[10] the specified speed is reached.
non
SHArP
Fb-30 S-curve ratio rEGLr Set this parameter to "non".
LooSE
[non]
Sets the distance the robot moves back from the
Homing back 1 to 255
Fb-35 mechanical end after detecting it during return-to-
distance [Depends on model]
origin operation using the stroke end method.
*2: Methods for displaying and entering these parameter values (–10000 to –19999) differ from other
methods. For the operation method, refer to "(3) Special display" in section 6.1.2, "Operating the digital
operator".
6-23

No. [Default value]
Sets the stroke-end current that is detected when
40 to 100
Current for the robot comes into contact with its mechanical end
Fb-36 (%)
striking limit during return-to-origin operation using the stroke
[Depends on model]
end method.
0.1 to 2.0 Sets the time during which the mechanical end is
Time for striking
Fb-37 (s) detected during return-to-origin operation using the
limit
[0.2] stroke end method.
Pole position
estimation speed –500 to 500
Fb-40 Sets the speed command value during magnetic
(Note 1) (mm/s)
* Valid only for pole position estimation.
[Depends on model]
RDP.
Pole position
estimation ACC/ 10 to 500
Fb-41 DEC time Sets the acceleration/deceleration time during
(Note 1) (ms)
magnetic pole position estimation.
* Valid only for [Depends on model]
RDP.
6 Fb-42
Pole position
estimation wait
time
0 to 500
(ms)
Sets the time interval during magnetic pole position
(Note 1)
estimation.
* Valid only for [100]
RDP.
Pole position
estimation
constant-speed 0 to 500
Fb-43 Sets the constant-speed time during magnetic pole
(Note 1)
time (ms)
position estimation.
[Depends on model]
* Valid only for
RDP.
Position sensor
wire breaking Set the current to be applied for detecting the
20 to 100
Fb-44 detection current position sensor wire breakage.
(Note 1) (%)
If this parameter is set to 100 [%], then the motor
* Valid only for [Depends on model]
rated current will be applied.
RDP.
Speed error
detection value 0 to maximum Set the speed deviation error detection value during
Fb-45 at pole position speed magnetic pole position estimation.
(Note 1)
estimation (mm/s) When set to 0, speed deviation errors will not be
* Valid only for [500] detected.
RDP.
Note 1: Displayed on the RDP only.
6-24
(3) Input/output terminal parameters

No. [Default value]
Sets the ON/OFF logic for the input terminals.
(Usually the logic is positive so the function turns on
when the external contact is closed.)
The logic setting for each terminal is assigned to
each bit of the parameter to set the logic as follows.
Bit setting Input terminal logic
Positive logic: Function turns on
0
when the external contact is closed.
Negative logic: Function turns on
1
when the external contact is opened.
The following tables show input terminals and bit
Input terminal 0000 to 3FFF assignment by this parameter.
FC-01
polarity setting [0400]
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12
O
Assigned not
O
Assigned not
CER PEN
6
ORG ORL Assigned not Assigned not

Assigned not Assigned not ROT FOT

TL Assigned not RS SON
Sets the ON/OFF logic for the output terminals.
(Usually the logic is positive so the contact output
turns on when the output function is ON.)
The logic setting for each terminal is assigned to
each bit of the parameter to set the logic as follows.
Bit setting Output terminal logic
Positive logic: The contact output turns
0
on when the output function is ON.
Negative logic: The contact output turns
1
off when the output function is ON.
The following tables show output terminals and bit
assignment by this parameter.
Output terminal 0000 to 00FF
FC-02
polarity setting [0002] bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12
O O O O
Assigned not Assigned not Assigned not Assigned not

O O O O
Assigned not Assigned not Assigned not Assigned not

Assigned not Assigned not BRK Assigned not

Assigned not INP ALM SRD
6-25

No. [Default value]
Sets the division ratio M/N of the position sensor
monitor signal. This setting's description changes in
relation to the type of position sensor. A "Mismatch
error (E40)" occurs without outputting position
sensor monitor signals if invalid combinations are
set as listed in the following table. This parameter is
Position sensor 16 to 8192 enabled by turning power off and then back on.
FC-09
monitor resolution M [1]
Position Effective range Position
sensor M N sensor Invalid
selection monitor combination
FA-81 FC-09 FC-10 division radio
(Note 2) FC-10=
1 to 64 1/N
1 65 to 8192
(Note 2) FC-10=
3 to 64 2/N
inCE 2 1, 2, 65 to 8192
(Note 1)
FC-09=8192
6
1 to 8191 M/8192 FC-10=
8192
1 to 8191
1 to 8192 Note 1: The position sensor monitor division ratio is

Position sensor set to "M/8192" when FC-10 is not equal to
FC-10 RDX [4]

monitor resolution N 8192. In all other cases, the position sensor
RDP [1]
monitor division ratio is set to "1/N" or "2/N"
according to FC-09.
Note 2: The FLIP-X series resolution is 16384
pulses per revolution of the motor.
The PHASER series resolution is 1 pulse
per micrometer.
This parameter specifies which phase of the
position sensor signal, phase A or phase B, leads
the other phase when the motor runs forward. Set
A this parameter to "b".
Position sensor
FC-11 b Setting Phase relation
monitor polarity
[b]
b Phase B leads phase A.
This parameter is enabled by turning power off and
then back on.
1PLS
nCunt
Phase Z output Sets the OZP and OZN terminal outputs. Set this
FC-12 ECunt
selection parameter to "1PLS".
qFort
[1PLS]
Sets the pulse train filter time constant as follows.
Lo
Command pulse Setting Filter time constant
FC-19 Hi
filter time constant Lo 1 μs
[Hi]
Hi 0.2 μs
1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
Communication Sets the baud rate used to communicate with the
FC-21 19200, 38400
baud rate PC (TOP software for RD series).
[bps]
[19200]
7,8
Communication Sets the bit length used to communicate with the PC
FC-22 [bit]
bit length (TOP software for RD series).
[8]
6-26

No. [Default value]
Sets the parity f used to communicate with the PC
(TOP software for RD series).
Setting Description
non Communication parity: none
Communication non, odd, EvEn
FC-23 odd Communication parity: odd
parity [non]
EvEn Communication parity: even
After this parameter is changed, turn power off and
then back on to enable the change. Otherwise, a
malfunction will occur.
Communication 1, 2 Sets the stop bit used to communicate with the PC
FC-24
stop bit [2] (TOP software for RD series).
Sets the data items to be output as the monitor
outputs 1 and 2 as shown in the table below. "yes"
indicates that the corresponding value is output,
and "no" indicates that 0V is output. The data items
nrF, nFb, iFb,

shown in the "3V output value" column are available
when the monitor output gains 1 and 2 are 100.0.
3.0V Control mode
6
Monitor output 1 tqr, nEr, PEr, Setting Data item output
FC-30 value Position Speed Torque
function PFq, brd
[nFb] Speed Maximum
nFb detection yes yes yes
speed
value
Torque Maximum
tqr command torque yes yes yes
value
Speed Maximum
nrF command speed yes yes no
value
Speed Maximum
nEr yes yes no
deviation speed
Five
Position
PEr motor yes no no
deviation rotations
Current Maximum
iFb yes yes yes
value current
Command Maximum
nrF, nFb, iFb, PFq pulse yes no no
Monitor output 2 tqr, nEr, PEr, speed
frequency
FC-33
function PFq, brd Regenerative Trip
[tqr] brd
braking level yes yes yes
resistor duty (FA-08)
ratio
Note: When an alarm has tripped, 0V is output from

all data items except the speed detection
value. However, if a position sensor error (E39)
occurs then the speed detection value is no
longer fixed.
This parameter specifies whether to output data
Monitor output 1 from monitor outputs 1 and 2 in a range of 0 to ±3.0V
FC-31 or 0 to 3.0V.
polarity
SiGn, AbS Setting Description
(Note)
[SiGn] SiGn 0 to ±3.0V
Monitor output 2 AbS 0 to 3.0V
FC-34
polarity Note: The output is positive only when FC-30 and
FC-33 are set to "PFq" or "brd".
6-27

No. [Default value]
Use these parameters to set the gain of monitor
outputs 1 and 2. When set to 100.0, the voltage
shown in the table for FC-30 and FC-33 is output.
The following graph shows the relation between
Monitor output 1 gain and output voltage (when FC-30 and FC-33 are
FC-32
gain set to "tqr").
Torque command value

200.0%
3.0V
0.0 to 3000.0 100.0%
(%)
[100.0] 50.0%
Minimum
value % 0
Monitor output 2 0
FC-35 Maximum
gain value %
6 -3.0V
This parameter specifies which of 1st function

0 to 3FFF
and 2nd function of the input terminal should be
[0]
enabled. (0 = 1st function, 1 = 2nd function)
Setting b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
0 CER PEN ORG ORL – –
1 Does not function. – –
Setting b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 – – ROT FOT TL – RS SON
Input terminal
FC-40 Does
function Does not
1 – – FOT ROT not –
function.
function.
Note 1: When either of b4 or b5 of FC40 is set to 1, b4 functions as
FOT and b5 as FOT.
Note 2: The FOT and ROT terminal functions do not change even if the
FA-14 (Motor revolution direction) setting is changed. FOT
prohibits counterclockwise direction and ROT prohibits
clockwise direction.
Note 3: After FA-14 or FC-40 setting is changed, turn power off and
then back on to enable the change.
Debug mode 0
FC-70 Set this parameter to "0".
selection [0]
6-28
(4) Control constant parameter

No. [Default value]
"Motor rotor Use this parameter to set the entire mover mass
Moment of inertia
inertia" to "motor including both rotary motor and load. This parameter
(RDX)
rotor inertia × 128" can also be set automatically by auto-tuning.
Fd-00
RDX (×10 -4kg·m 2) Use this parameter to set the entire mover mass
Mover mass
RDP (×10kg) including both linear motor and load. This parameter
(RDP)
[Depends on model] can also be set automatically by auto-tuning.
The speed control gain for speed PI control is
calculated from the mover mass and this parameter
0.1 to 500.0 setting. Usually set this parameter to a value close
Speed control cut- to the 3dB cut-off frequency obtained by measuring
Fd-01 (Hz)
off frequency the frequency characteristic with a repetitive
[Depends on model] waveform when the speed control section performs
PI control. When IP control is specified in Fd-05, the
response speed becomes lower than the set value.
Set this parameter to adjust the proportional gain
0.01 to 300.00 used for speed PI control. When set to 100%, the
Speed control
Fd-02
proportional gain
(%)
[Depends on model]
proportional gain is set to the constant specified in
Fd-00 and Fd-01.
(Proportional gain) ∝ (Fd-00) × (Fd-01) × Fd-02 / 100
6
Set this parameter to adjust the integral gain used for
0.01 to 300.00
Speed control speed PI control. When set to 100%, the integral gain
Fd-03 (%)
integral gain is set to the constant specified in Fd-00 and Fd-01.
[Depends on model] (Integral gain) ∝ (Fd-00) × (Fd-01) 2 × Fd-03 / 100
0.1 to 99.9 Set the gain used for speed P control. Set it by the
Fd-04 P-control gain (%) torque (rated torque) to be output when a 1% speed
[Depends on model] deviation is provided.
Use this parameter to continuously switch the
speed feedback loop between PI and IP. When
this parameter is set to 0, ordinary PI control
0.00 to 1.00 is performed. At 1.00, IP control is performed.
Fd-05 IP-control gain
[Depends on model] However, if this parameter (Fd-05) is set to a
large value while Fd-00 and Fd-01 are large, then
oscillation might occur. In this case, reduce Fd-02
to avoid such oscillation.
0.00 to 500.00 This parameter sets the time constant for the first-order
Torque command
Fd-06 (ms) lag filter to be applied to the torque command value.
[Depends on model] When this parameter is set to 0, no filtering is performed.
Position phase Sets the compensation ratio for the phase lag filter
0.01 to 9.99 to apply to the speed command value serving as the
Fd-07 compensating
[Depends on model] position control loop output.
ratio When this parameter exceeds 1, a phase lag occurs.
Position phase 0.1 to 999.9 Sets the compensation time constant for the phase
Fd-08 compensating (ms) lag filter to apply to the speed command serving as
time constant [Depends on model] the position control loop output.
0.01 to 99.99 Sets the response frequency of the position
Position control
Fd-09 (Hz) feedback loop. Usually set this parameter to about
cut-off frequency
[Depends on model] 1/6 of the speed control cut-off frequency.
Position feed 0.00 to 1.00 Sets the ratio used to perform feed-forward
Fd-10
forward gain [Depends on model] compensation for the position control.
3.0 to 1000.0
Notch filter 1 Sets the resonance frequency of notch filter 1.
Fd-12 (Hz)
frequency (Use TOP software to set this parameter.)
[Depends on model]
0 to 40 Sets the bandwidth of notch filter 1 at the resonance
Notch filter 1
Fd-13 (dB) frequency.
bandwidth (Use TOP software to set this parameter.)
[Depends on model]
6-29

No. [Default value]
3.0 to 1000.0
Notch filter 2 Sets the resonance frequency of notch filter 1.
Fd-14 (Hz)
frequency (Use TOP software to set this parameter.)
[Depends on model]
0 to 40 Set the bandwidth of notch filter 2 at the resonance
Notch filter 2
Fd-15 (dB) frequency.
bandwidth (Use TOP software to set this parameter.)
[Depends on model]
0 to 60000 Sets the time constant for the first-order lag filter
Speed command
Fd-20 (ms) to apply to the speed command value. When this
[Depends on model] parameter is set to 0, no filtering is performed.
Sets the switching function in gain switch mode. Do
non not set this parameter to "GCH".
Gain change AUto Setting Description
Fd-30
mode GCH
[Depends on model] non Gain does not change.
AUto Gain changes automatically.
Sets the threshold value of the position error width
6 Fd-31
Position error
width for gain
change
0 to 65535
[pulses]
[Depends on model]
(difference between position command value and
position detection value) used to start automatic
gain change (Fd-30: AUto) in position control mode.
Set this parameter in units of the number of position
sensor pulses.
Sets the second position control cut-off frequency to
perform gain change in position control mode.
Second position 0.01 to 99.99
Fd-30 Position error Cut-off
Fd-32 control cut-off (Hz) setting (d-09) frequency
frequency [Depends on model]
(d-09) ≤ Fd-31 (Fd-32)
AUto
(d-09) > Fd-31 (Fd-09)
Position gain 0.0 to 500.0 Sets the gain change time constant to perform
Fd-33 change time (ms) gain change in position control mode. When this
constant [Depends on model] parameter is set to 0, the gain changes immediately.
Sets the time constant for the first-order lag filter
to apply to a position command value. When this
0 to 60000 parameter is set to 0, no filtering is performed.
Position command
Fd-36 (ms) Always set to 0 when performing -one-way
[Depends on model] continuous operation or one-way synchronous
conveyor operation in position control mode. If not
set to 0, a position error fault (E83) will occur.
Sets the fast positioning mode to perform fast
positioning in position control mode. When setting
this parameter to "FASt" or "FoL", set the Moment
non of inertia (Fd-00) correctly.
Fast positioning FASt
Fd-40 Setting Description
mode FoL
[Depends on model] non Performs normal position control
FASt Shortens the positioning settling time.
FoL Performs minimum position error control.
Position feed 0.00 to 500.00 Sets the time constant for the first-order lag filter
used for position feed forward compensation in
Fd-41 forward filter time (ms)
position control. When this parameter is set to 0, no
constant [Depends on model] filtering is performed.
0 to 100 Use this parameter to adjust the amount of position
Position error
Fd-42 (%) error which may occur during "minimum position
filter gain
[Depends on model] error control" in position control mode.
0.00 to 500.00 Set the time constant for the first-order lag filter
Fd-44 Speed feedback used for speed detection values.
(ms)
(Note 1) filter time constant When this parameter is set to 0, no filtering is
[Depends on model] performed.
6-30

No. [Default value]
"Robot mass" to
Mover mass for
Fd-46 "robot mass × 128" Sets the mover mass during for pole position
pole position
(Note 1) (× 10kg) estimation.
estimation
[Depends on model]
Speed control
0.1 to 500.0
Fd-47 cut-off frequency Sets the speed control cut-off frequency for
(Hz)
(Note 1) for pole position magnetic pole position estimation.
[Depends on model]
estimation
Gain change time Sets the time constant of the first-order lag filter
0.0 to 500.0
Fd-48 constant after to reduce switching shock during control gain
(ms)
(Note 1) pole position switching after the magnetic pole position estimation
[Depends on model is completed.
estimation
6-31
6.3.3 Reference graph for setting the acceleration and

position control cut-off frequency
For your reference, the following graphs show payload, acceleration, and position
control cut-off frequency (Fd-09), plotted when the moment of inertia or mover mass
(Fd-00), speed control cut-off frequency (Fd-01), and speed control integral gain (Fd-03)
parameters are set to the specified values for each robot model. By referring to these
graphs, set the position control cut-off frequency (Fd-09) and acceleration that match the
required payload.
How to read graph
Example: T7-12
Model T7-12
Maximum payload [kg] 8.0 [kg]
6 Fd-00 Moment of inertia 0.125 [×10 -4kg •m 2]

Fd-01 Speed control cut-off frequency 100.0 [Hz]
Fd-03 Speed control integral gain 65.0 [%]
0.60 14.0
Payload Acceleration Fd-09

[kg] [G] [Hz] Acceleration[G]
0.50 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0

0.0 0.55 11.6
2.0 0.49 8.8
Acceleration[G]
0.46[G] 10.0
4.0 0.43 7.0 0.40
7.85[Hz]
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.37 5.9 8.0
8.0 0.31 5.0 0.30
6.0
0.20
4.0
0.10
2.0
0.00 0.0
The above table shows
examples for setting accel- 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
erations and position control Payload[kg]
cut-off frequencies (Fd-09)
that match different
payloads. If the required
payload is not listed in this Example: If a payload of 3kg is required,
table, refer to the graph on then the acceleration is 0.46 [G]
the right. and the position control cut-off
frequency (Fd-09) is 7.85 [Hz].
6-32
■ RDX
Model T4H-2 (C4H-2)
Fd-00 Moment of inertia 0.029 [×10 -4kg•m 2]

0.12 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.10 12.0
0.0 0.10 12.0
2.0 0.10 8.5
Acceleration[G]
10.0
4.0 0.10 6.5 0.08
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.10 4.5 8.0
0.06
6.0
0.04
0.02 Acceleration[G]
4.0
2.0
6
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Payload[kg]
Model T4H-2-BK (C4H-2-BK)


0.08 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.07
0.0 0.07 10.0 10.0
2.0 0.07 8.5 0.06
4.0 0.07 7.0 8.0
Acceleration[G]
0.05
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.07 6.0

7.2 0.05 5.0 0.04 6.0
0.03
4.0
0.02
Acceleration[G] 2.0
0.01 Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
Payload[kg]
6-33
Model T4H-6 (C4H-6)


0.35 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.30
0.0 0.31 10.5 10.0
2.0 0.31 8.5
Acceleration[G]
0.25
4.0 0.21 6.0 8.0
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.21 5.0 0.20
6.0
0.15
4.0
0.10
6 0.05 Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Payload[kg]


0.35 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.30 6.0
0.0 0.31 6.1
1.0 0.31 5.4
0.25 5.0
Acceleration[G]
2.0 0.31 4.8

Fd-09[Hz]
2.4 0.31 4.4 0.20 4.0
0.15 3.0
0.10 2.0
Acceleration[G]
0.05 Fd-09[Hz] 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Payload[kg]
6-34
Model T4H-12 (C4H-12)


0.70 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.60
0.0 0.61 9.2
8.0
1.0 0.61 6.4 Acceleration[G]
0.50 7.0
2.0 0.43 5.0
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.43 5.0 0.40
4.5 0.31 5.0 5.0
0.30
4.0
0.20 3.0
0.10
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
2.0
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
Payload[kg]


0.70 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.60 6.0
0.0 0.61 6.0
1.2 0.61 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.50 5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.40 4.0
0.30 3.0
0.20 2.0
0.10 Acceleration[G] 1.0

Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
Payload[kg]
6-35
Model T5H-6 (C5H-6)


0.25 9.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 8.0
0.0 0.21 8.0 0.20
7.0
1.0 0.20 8.0
Acceleration[G]
3.0 0.17 8.0 6.0

0.15
Fd-09[Hz]
5.0 0.14 8.0 5.0
7.0 0.12 8.0
4.0
9.0 0.10 8.0 0.10
3.0
6 0.05
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0

Payload[kg]


0.25 9.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
8.0
0.0 0.21 8.0
0.20 7.0
1.0 0.21 8.0
2.0 0.18 8.0 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.15
Fd-09[Hz]
2.4 0.14 8.0 5.0
4.0
0.10
3.0
0.05 2.0
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz] 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Payload[kg]
6-36
Model T5H-12 (C5H-12)


0.50 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.45
6.0
0.0 0.43 6.0
0.40
1.0 0.40 5.1
0.35 5.0
Acceleration[G]
3.0 0.26 4.5
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
5.0 0.21 4.5 4.0
0.25
3.0
0.20
0.15 2.0
0.10
0.05
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
6
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Payload[kg]


0.40 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.35
0.0 0.37 10.0 10.0
1.2 0.24 10.0 0.30
Acceleration[G]
8.0
0.25
Fd-09[Hz]
0.20 6.0
0.15
4.0
0.10
Acceleration[G] 2.0
0.05
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
Payload[kg]
6-37
Model T5H-20

0.35 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 0.32 6.0
0.30 6.0
1.0 0.32 6.0

Acceleration[G]
0.25 5.0
2.0 0.24 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.19 6.0 0.20 4.0
0.15 3.0
0.10 2.0
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Payload[kg]
Model T6-6 (C6-6)


0.25 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 0.23 10.0 10.0
0.20
5.0 0.20 8.3
Acceleration[G]
10.0 0.17 7.1 8.0

0.15
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.14 6.2

20.0 0.13 6.0 6.0
25.0 0.11 6.0 0.10
30.0 0.10 6.0 4.0
0.05
Acceleration[G] 2.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]
6-38
Model T6-6-BK (C6-6-BK)


0.25 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
7.0
0.0 0.20 7.5
0.20
2.0 0.19 7.0 Acceleration[G] 6.0
4.0 0.18 6.6
0.15 5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.16 6.1
8.0 0.14 6.0 4.0
0.10
3.0
2.0
0.05
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Payload[kg]
Model T6-12 (C6-12)


0.50 9.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.45 8.0
0.0 0.46 8.3
0.40
7.0
2.0 0.40 6.5
Acceleration[G]
0.35
4.0 0.34 5.4 6.0
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.30 5.0 5.0

8.0 0.26 5.0 0.25
4.0
10.0 0.23 5.0 0.20
12.0 0.18 5.0 3.0
0.15
2.0
0.10
Acceleration[G]
0.05 1.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
Payload[kg]
6-39
Model T6-12-BK (C6-12-BK)


0.45 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.40
6.0
0.0 0.40 6.6
0.35
1.0 0.40 5.8
Acceleration[G]
5.0
2.0 0.37 5.2 0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.34 5.0 4.0
0.25
4.0 0.31 5.0
0.20 3.0
0.15
2.0
6 0.10
0.05
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
Model T6-20

1.20 5.3
5.2
1.00 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 1.05 5.2
5.1
3.0 0.94 4.5
Acceleration[G]
5.0 0.84 4.5 0.80 5.0

Fd-09[Hz]
7.0 0.79 4.5

4.9
10.0 0.68 4.5 0.60
4.8
0.40 4.7
4.6
0.20
4.5
0.00 4.4
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
6-40
Model T7-12

0.60 14.0
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.0 0.55 11.6 0.50
10.0
4.0 0.43 7.0 0.40
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.37 5.9 8.0
8.0 0.31 5.0 0.30
6.0
0.20
4.0
0.10 2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Payload[kg]
Model T7-12-BK

0.50 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.45
0.0 0.43 10.4 10.0
0.40
1.0 0.40 8.9
0.35
2.0 0.37 7.7 8.0
Acceleration[G]
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.34 6.9

0.25 6.0
0.20
4.0
0.15
2.0
0.05 Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Payload[kg]
6-41
Model T9-5

0.18 9.0
0.16 8.0
0.0 0.17 8.4 Fd-09[Hz]
0.14 7.0
20.0 0.14 7.1
Acceleration[G]
40.0 0.12 6.1 0.12 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.09 6.0
0.10 5.0
80.0 0.08 6.0
0.08 4.0
0.06 3.0
6 0.04
0.02
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
Model T9-5-BK

0.18 6.9
0.16 6.8
0.0 0.17 6.8 Fd-09[Hz]
0.14 6.7
5.0 0.15 6.5
Acceleration[G]
6.6
10.0 0.14 6.3 0.12
6.5
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.13 6.0

0.10
20.0 0.11 6.0 6.4
0.08
6.3
0.06
6.2
0.04
6.1
0.02 6.0
0.00 5.9
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
6-42
Model T9-10

0.50 9.0
0.45 8.0
0.0 0.46 8.3 Fd-09[Hz]
0.40
7.0
0.35
20.0 0.33 6.0 6.0
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.28 6.0
5.0
40.0 0.22 6.0 0.25
4.0
55.0 0.16 6.0 0.20
3.0
0.15
0.10
0.05
2.0
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0
Payload[kg]
Model T9-10-BK

0.60 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] Acceleration[G] 6.9
0.0 0.49 6.9 0.50 Fd-09[Hz]
6.8
2.0 0.45 6.4
Acceleration[G]
6.7
4.0 0.41 6.0 0.40
6.6
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.37 6.0

6.5
8.0 0.33 6.0 0.30
6.4
10.0 0.29 6.0
6.3
0.20
6.2
0.10 6.1
6.0
0.00 5.9
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
6-43
Model T9-20

1.00 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90
6.0
0.0 0.87 6.5
0.80
5.0 0.67 5.5
Acceleration[G]
0.70 5.0
10.0 0.51 5.5
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.41 5.5 4.0
20.0 0.36 5.5 0.50
25.0 0.25 5.5 3.0
0.40
30.0 0.20 5.5
0.30 2.0
6 0.20
0.10
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0

Payload[kg]
Model T9-20-BK

1.00 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90
7.0
0.0 0.87 7.0
0.80
1.0 0.75 7.0 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.70
2.0 0.65 7.0
5.0
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.56 7.0

4.0 0.50 7.0 0.50 4.0
0.40
3.0
0.30
2.0
0.20
Acceleration[G]
1.0
0.10 Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
6-44
Model T9-30

0.90 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.80
0.0 0.81 5.9 6.0
0.70
5.0
6.0 0.68 4.0 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
9.0 0.50 4.0 4.0
0.50
12.0 0.40 4.0
0.40 3.0
15.0 0.34 4.0
0.30
2.0
0.20
0.10
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Payload[kg]
Model T9H-5

0.25 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 0.23 12.0 12.0
0.20
20.0 0.19 11.4
Acceleration[G]
10.0
40.0 0.16 9.9
0.15
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.13 8.8 8.0

80.0 0.10 7.9
100.0 0.09 7.1 6.0
0.10
4.0
0.05
Acceleration[G] 2.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0
Payload[kg]
6-45
Model T9H-5-BK

0.20 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.18
7.0
0.0 0.19 7.5
0.16
10.0 0.17 7.0 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.14
20.0 0.14 6.5
5.0
0.12
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.11 6.1
0.10 4.0
0.08
3.0
0.06
2.0
6 0.04
0.02
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]
Model T9H-10

0.60 10.0
9.0
0.0 0.51 9.3 0.50 Fd-09[Hz]
8.0
20.0 0.38 5.6
Acceleration[G]
7.0
40.0 0.28 4.5 0.40
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.20 4.5

80.0 0.15 4.5 0.30 5.0
4.0
0.20
3.0
2.0
0.10
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
6-46
Model T9H-10-BK

0.34 9.0
8.0
0.33 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.33 7.9
7.0
0.32
10.0 0.31 6.0 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.30 5.4 0.31 5.0
20.0 0.28 4.9
0.30 4.0
3.0
0.29
0.28
2.0
1.0 6
0.27 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
Model T9H-20

0.80 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.70 12.0
0.0 0.67 12.0
10.0 0.61 6.7 0.60
Acceleration[G]
10.0
20.0 0.56 4.5
0.50
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.51 4.5 8.0

40.0 0.46 4.5 0.40
6.0
0.30
4.0
0.20
Acceleration[G] 2.0
0.10
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Payload[kg]
6-47
Model T9H-20-BK

1.00 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90
6.0
0.0 0.91 6.7
0.80
2.0 0.86 5.6
Acceleration[G]
0.70 5.0
4.0 0.81 5.5
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.76 5.5 4.0
8.0 0.71 5.5 0.50
3.0
0.40
0.30 2.0
6 0.20
0.10
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0

Payload[kg]
Model T9H-30

1.20 12.0
0.0 1.00 11.1 1.00 Fd-09[Hz] 10.0
5.0 1.00 5.9
Acceleration[G]
10.0 0.86 4.0 0.80 8.0

Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.64 3.0

20.0 0.48 2.5 0.60 6.0
25.0 0.28 2.5
0.40 4.0
0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
Payload[kg]
6-48
Model F8-6 (C8-6)


0.35 10.0
Payload Acceleration Fd-09 Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.30 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.31 9.0
8.0
10.0 0.25 7.5
0.25
Acceleration[G]
7.0
20.0 0.19 6.4
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.14 5.2 0.20
40.0 0.07 5.0 5.0
0.15
4.0
0.10 3.0
0.05
2.0
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Payload[kg]
Model F8-6-BK (C8-6-BK)


0.40 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.35
0.0 0.34 11.0 10.0
2.0 0.31 10.5 0.30
Acceleration[G]
4.0 0.28 10.5 8.0

0.25
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.25 10.0

8.0 0.22 9.0 0.20 6.0
Fd-09[Hz] 4.0
0.10
2.0
0.05
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Payload[kg]
6-49
Model F8-12 (C8-12)


0.50 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.45 9.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.43 9.0
0.40 8.0
5.0 0.37 7.2
Acceleration[G]
0.35 7.0
10.0 0.27 5.0
0.30 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.22 4.5
20.0 0.19 4.5 0.25 5.0
0.20 4.0
0.15 3.0
6 0.10
0.05
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]


0.60 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 0.49 11.0 0.50 10.0
1.0 0.47 11.0
Acceleration[G]
2.0 0.45 10.0 0.40 8.0

Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.42 9.5

4.0 0.40 8.8 0.30 6.0
0.20 4.0
Acceleration[G]
0.10 2.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
6-50
Model F8-20 (C8-20)


0.60 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.52 7.0 0.50
10.0 0.31 4.5 0.40
5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
12.0 0.27 4.5
0.30 4.0
3.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
Payload[kg]
Model F8L-5 (C8L-5)


0.35 10.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.30 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.31 8.7
8.0
10.0 0.31 7.6
0.25
Acceleration[G]
7.0
20.0 0.31 6.7
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.23 6.0 0.20

40.0 0.13 5.5 5.0
50.0 0.09 5.0 0.15
4.0
0.10 3.0
2.0
0.05
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0
Payload[kg]
6-51
Model F8L-5-BK (C8L-5-BK)


0.30 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.0 0.26 9.1 0.25
8.0
5.0 0.23 8.5
Acceleration[G]
7.0
10.0 0.21 8.0 0.20
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.18 7.6
16.0 0.18 7.5 0.15 5.0
4.0
0.10
3.0
6
Acceleration[G]
2.0
0.05 Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
Payload[kg]
Model F8L-10 (C8L-10)


0.70 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.60 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.62 8.9
8.0
10.0 0.41 5.7
0.50
Acceleration[G]
7.0
20.0 0.31 4.2
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.22 4.0 0.40

40.0 0.16 4.0 5.0
0.30
4.0
0.20 3.0
2.0
0.10
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Payload[kg]
6-52


0.60 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.57 9.1 0.50
8.0
7.0
4.0 0.46 7.6 0.40
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.41 7.0
8.0 0.36 6.5 0.30 5.0
4.0
0.20
3.0
0.10
2.0
1.0
6
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Payload[kg]
Model F8L-20 (C8L-20)


0.80 10.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.70 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.72 9.2
8.0
5.0 0.62 5.0 0.60
Acceleration[G]
7.0
10.0 0.41 3.5
0.50
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.31 3.0

20.0 0.21 3.0 0.40 5.0
4.0
0.30
3.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
6-53


0.70 10.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.60 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.62 9.2
8.0
1.0 0.58 8.0
0.50
Acceleration[G]
7.0
2.0 0.54 7.0
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.50 7.0 0.40
4.0 0.46 7.0 5.0
0.30
4.0
0.20 3.0
6 0.10
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
Model F8L-30

0.80 8.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.70 Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.71 7.0
2.0 0.65 6.0 0.60 6.0
4.0 0.59 4.6
Acceleration[G]
0.50 5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.53 4.0

8.0 0.47 4.0 0.40 4.0
10.0 0.40 4.0
0.30 3.0
0.20 2.0
0.10 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
6-54
Model F8LH-5 (C8LH-5)


0.35 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.30 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.31 9.7 10.0
20.0 0.31 7.4
0.25
8.0
Acceleration[G]
40.0 0.13 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.08 5.0 0.20
80.0 0.08 5.0 6.0
0.15
4.0
0.10
0.05
2.0
6
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]


0.70 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.60 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.62 9.8 10.0
20.0 0.31 4.7
0.50
8.0
Acceleration[G]
40.0 0.16 3.1

Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.10 3.0 0.40

6.0
0.30
4.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0
Payload[kg]
6-55


0.80 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.70 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.72 9.0
8.0
10.0 0.41 4.1 0.60
7.0
Acceleration[G]
20.0 0.21 3.0

0.50
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.15 3.0
0.40 5.0
4.0
0.30
3.0
0.20
6 0.10
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0

Payload[kg]
Model F10-5 (C10-5)


0.18 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.16 7.0
0.0 0.17 7.2
0.14
10.0 0.15 6.5 6.0
Acceleration[G]
20.0 0.14 6.0 0.12

5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.13 6.0 0.10

40.0 0.12 6.0 4.0
0.08
50.0 0.11 6.0
3.0
60.0 0.10 6.0 0.06
2.0
0.04
Acceleration[G]
0.02 1.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0
Payload[kg]
6-56


0.18 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.16
0.0 0.17 6.0 6.0
5.0 0.15 6.0 Acceleration[G] 0.14

5.0
10.0 0.14 6.0 0.12
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.13 6.0 4.0
0.10
20.0 0.11 6.0
0.08 3.0
0.06
2.0
0.04
0.02
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
Model F10-10 (C10-10)


0.50 7.2
0.45
Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.46 7.0
0.40
10.0 0.39 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.35 6.8
20.0 0.33 6.0
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.28 6.0 6.6

40.0 0.22 6.0 0.25
6.4
0.20
0.15 6.2
0.10
6.0
0.05
0.00 5.8
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Payload[kg]
6-57


0.40 7.2
0.35 Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.38 7.1
2.0 0.35 6.7 0.30
Acceleration[G]
6.8
4.0 0.32 6.3
0.25
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.29 6.0 6.6
8.0 0.27 6.0 0.20
10.0 0.24 6.0 6.4
0.15
6.2
0.10
6 0.05 6.0
0.00 5.8
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0

Payload[kg]
Model F10-20 (C10-20)


0.70 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Acceleration[G]
0.60 Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.61 7.4
5.0 0.49 5.5 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.50
10.0 0.39 5.5
5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.31 5.5 0.40

20.0 0.26 5.5 4.0
0.30
3.0
0.20
2.0
0.10 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
6-58


1.00 7.0
0.90
Fd-09[Hz] 6.0
0.0 0.87 6.3
0.80
0.70 5.0
2.0 0.64 5.2
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.56 5.0 4.0
4.0 0.50 5.0 0.50
3.0
0.40
0.30 2.0
0.20
0.10
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
Model F10-30

0.90 10.0
0.80 9.0
0.0 0.77 8.8 Fd-09[Hz]
8.0
0.70
5.0 0.77 5.0
Acceleration[G]
7.0
10.0 0.37 5.0 0.60
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.24 5.0

0.50
5.0
0.40
4.0
0.30
3.0
0.20
2.0
0.10 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Payload[kg]
6-59
Model F14-5 (C14-5)


0.18 10.0
0.16 9.0
0.0 0.17 8.8 Fd-09[Hz]
8.0
0.14
20.0 0.14 7.4
Acceleration[G]
7.0
40.0 0.12 6.3 0.12
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.09 6.0
0.10
80.0 0.08 6.0 5.0
0.08
4.0
0.06
3.0
6 0.04
0.02
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]


0.18 7.2
0.16
Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.17 7.1
0.14
5.0 0.15 6.8
Acceleration[G]
6.8
10.0 0.14 6.5 0.12
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.13 6.3 0.10 6.6

20.0 0.11 6.0
0.08 6.4
0.06
6.2
0.04
6.0
0.02
0.00 5.8
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
6-60
Model F14-10 (C14-10)


0.50 10.0
0.45 9.0
0.0 0.46 9.0 Fd-09[Hz]
0.40 8.0
0.35 7.0
20.0 0.33 6.0
0.30 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.28 6.0
40.0 0.22 6.0 0.25 5.0
55.0 0.16 6.0 0.20 4.0
0.15 3.0
0.10
0.05
2.0
1.0
6
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0
Payload[kg]


0.60 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
7.0
0.0 0.49 7.3 0.50
3.0 0.43 6.6 6.0
Acceleration[G]
5.0 0.39 6.2 0.40

5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
8.0 0.33 6.0

10.0 0.29 6.0 0.30 4.0
3.0
0.20
2.0
1.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
6-61
Model F14-20 (C14-20)


1.00 8.0
0.90
Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.87 7.5
0.80
1.0 0.83 6.7 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.70
5.0 0.67 5.5
5.0
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
10.0 0.51 5.5
15.0 0.41 5.5 0.50 4.0
20.0 0.36 5.5 0.40
3.0
25.0 0.25 5.5
0.30
30.0 0.20 5.5 2.0
6 0.20
0.10
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]


1.00 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90
7.0
0.0 0.87 7.0 0.80
1.0 0.75 7.0 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.70
2.0 0.64 7.0
0.60 5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
3.0 0.56 7.0

4.0 0.50 7.0 0.50 4.0
0.40
3.0
0.30
2.0
0.20
Acceleration[G]
0.10 1.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Payload[kg]
6-62
Model F14-30

1.20 8.0
Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 1.03 7.2 1.00
6.0 0.68 4.0 0.80
5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
9.0 0.50 4.0
12.0 0.40 4.0 0.60 4.0
15.0 0.34 4.0
3.0
0.40
2.0
0.20
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Payload[kg]
Model F14H-5 (C14H-5)


0.25 14.0
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.0 0.23 12.0
0.20
20.0 0.19 10.7
Acceleration[G]
10.0
40.0 0.16 9.3
0.15
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.13 8.3 8.0

80.0 0.10 7.4
100.0 0.09 6.7 6.0
0.10
4.0
0.05
2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0
Payload[kg]
6-63
Model F14H-5-BK (C14H-5-BK)


0.20 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.18
6.0
0.0 0.19 6.2
0.16
10.0 0.17 5.7
Acceleration[G]
0.14 5.0
20.0 0.14 5.3
0.12
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.11 5.0 4.0
0.10
3.0
0.08
0.06 2.0
6 0.04
0.02
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]
Model F14H-10 (C14H-10)


0.60 9.0
8.0
0.50 Fd-09[Hz]
0.0 0.51 8.5
7.0
20.0 0.38 5.2
Acceleration[G]
40.0 0.28 4.5 0.40 6.0

Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.20 4.5

5.0
80.0 0.15 4.5 0.30
4.0
0.20 3.0
2.0
0.10
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
6-64


0.34 8.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.33 Fd-09[Hz] 7.0
0.0 0.33 7.3
0.32
10.0 0.31 5.6
5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.30 5.0 0.31
20.0 0.28 4.5 4.0
0.30
3.0
0.29
2.0
0.28 1.0 6
0.27 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
Model F14H-20 (C14H-20)


Payload Acceleration Fd-09 1.20 8.0

7.0
0.0 1.02 7.0 1.00 Fd-09[Hz]
10.0 0.82 6.5 6.0
Acceleration[G]
20.0 0.67 6.0 0.80

5.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.56 5.0

40.0 0.46 5.0 0.60 4.0
3.0
0.40
2.0
0.20
1.0
0.00 0.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Payload[kg]
6-65


1.00 8.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90
7.0
0.0 0.91 7.0
0.80
2.0 0.86 5.8 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.70
4.0 0.81 5.5
5.0
0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.76 5.5
8.0 0.71 5.5 0.50 4.0
0.40
3.0
0.30
6
2.0
0.20
Acceleration[G]
1.0
0.10 Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
Payload[kg]
Model F14H-30

1.20 12.0
0.0 1.00 10.6 1.00 Fd-09[Hz] 10.0
5.0 1.00 5.8
Acceleration[G]
10.0 0.86 4.0 0.80 8.0

Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.64 3.1

20.0 0.50 3.0 0.60 6.0
25.0 0.31 3.0
0.40 4.0
0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
Payload[kg]
6-66
Model F17L-50 (C17L-50)


0.90 7.0
0.80
0.0 0.77 6.5 Fd-09[Hz] 6.0
10.0 0.55 6.5 Acceleration[G] 0.70

5.0
20.0 0.37 5.9 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.24 4.5 4.0
0.50
40.0 0.16 3.6
50.0 0.16 3.5 0.40 3.0
0.30
2.0
0.20
0.10
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Payload[kg]


1.00 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.90 6.8
0.0 0.94 6.4
0.80 6.6
5.0 0.57 6.0
0.70 6.4
10.0 0.28 6.0
Acceleration[G]
0.60 6.2
Fd-09[Hz]
0.50 6.0
0.40 5.8
0.30 5.6
0.20 Acceleration[G] 5.4
0.10 Fd-09[Hz] 5.2
0.00 5.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
6-67
Model F17-10 (C17-10)


0.50 12.0
0.45
0.0 0.47 11.4 Fd-09[Hz] 10.0
0.40
30.0 0.36 9.1
Acceleration[G]
0.35
60.0 0.26 7.6 8.0
0.30
Fd-09[Hz]
90.0 0.20 6.5
120.0 0.15 5.7 0.25 6.0
0.20
4.0
0.15
6 0.10
0.05
2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0
Payload[kg]


0.40 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.35
0.0 0.38 10.0 10.0
5.0 0.36 10.0 0.30
Acceleration[G]
10.0 0.33 10.0 8.0

0.25
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.31 10.0

20.0 0.28 10.0 0.20 6.0
25.0 0.26 10.0
0.15
30.0 0.23 10.0 4.0
35.0 0.20 10.0 0.10
Acceleration[G] 2.0
0.05
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0
Payload[kg]
6-68
Model F17-20 (C17-20)


0.80 14.0
0.70 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.0 0.72 11.8
1.0 0.72 11.5 Acceleration[G] 0.60
10.0
10.0 0.67 9.1
0.50
Fd-09[Hz]
20.0 0.61 7.3 8.0
40.0 0.51 5.3 0.40
60.0 0.41 4.2 6.0
0.30
80.0 0.31 3.5
4.0
0.20
0.10 2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]


0.90 14.0
0.80
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.0 0.81 11.6
0.70
5.0 0.68 10.2
Acceleration[G]
10.0
10.0 0.55 9.1 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.44 8.2 8.0

0.50
0.40 6.0
0.30
4.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Payload[kg]
6-69
Model F17-40

0.80 7.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.70 6.0
0.0 0.74 6.1
10.0 0.74 5.0 0.60
Acceleration[G]
5.0
20.0 0.49 5.0
0.50
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.37 5.0 4.0
40.0 0.29 5.0 0.40
3.0
0.30
2.0
0.20
6 0.10
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0
Payload[kg]


0.40 9.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.35 8.0
0.0 0.38 8.5
7.0
10.0 0.33 8.0 0.30
Acceleration[G]
20.0 0.28 7.5 6.0

0.25
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.23 7.1

5.0
40.0 0.18 6.7 0.20
4.0
45.0 0.15 6.5
0.15
3.0
0.10
2.0
Acceleration[G]
0.05 1.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0
Payload[kg]
6-70
Model F20-20 (C20-20)


0.90 9.0
0.80 8.0
0.0 0.82 8.3 Fd-09[Hz]
0.70 7.0
40.0 0.46 4.1 0.60 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.33 3.5
0.50 5.0
80.0 0.22 3.5
0.40 4.0
100.0 0.14 3.5
120.0 0.10 3.5 0.30 3.0
0.20
0.10
2.0
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0
Payload[kg]


1.20 10.0
[kg] [G] [Hz] 9.0
0.0 1.01 9.4 1.00
8.0
10.0 0.74 7.5
7.0
20.0 0.50 7.5 0.80
Acceleration[G]
6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
25.0 0.40 7.5

0.60 5.0
4.0
0.40
3.0
2.0
Fd-09[Hz] 1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
Payload[kg]
6-71
Model F20-40

1.20 14.0
0.0 0.98 12.0 12.0
1.00 Fd-09[Hz]
20.0 0.67 5.8
10.0
40.0 0.36 4.0 0.80
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.21 4.0 8.0
0.60
6.0
0.40
4.0
6 0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0

Payload[kg]
Model F20N-20

0.90 14.0
0.80
0.0 0.82 12.0 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.70
20.0 0.63 9.9
Acceleration[G]
10.0
40.0 0.46 6.5 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.33 5.0 8.0

0.50
80.0 0.22 5.0
0.40 6.0
0.30
4.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
6-72
Model N15-10

0.60 14.0
Acceleration [G]
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Fd-09 [Hz] 12.0
0.0 0.51 11.7 0.50
20.0 0.38 10.0
10.0
Acceleration[G]
40.0 0.28 8.7 0.40
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.20 7.7 8.0
80.0 0.14 6.9 0.30
6.0
0.20
4.0
0.10
2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
Model N15-20

1.20 14.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.0 1.02 12.0 1.00
10.0 0.82 10.4
Acceleration[G]
10.0
20.0 0.67 8.4 0.80
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.56 7.1 8.0

40.0 0.46 6.1 0.60
50.0 0.40 6.0 6.0
0.40
4.0
0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0
Payload[kg]
6-73
Model N15-30

1.20 9.0
Payload Acceleration Fd-09 Acceleration [G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 8.0
Fd-09 [Hz]
0.0 0.99 8.5 1.00
7.0
10.0 0.86 5.4
Acceleration[G]
20.0 0.50 5.0 0.80 6.0
Fd-09[Hz]
30.0 0.36 5.0 5.0
0.60
4.0
0.40 3.0
6 0.20
2.0
1.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]
Model N18-20

0.90 14.0
0.80
0.0 0.82 12.0 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0.70
20.0 0.56 9.4
Acceleration[G]
10.0
40.0 0.43 7.4 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
60.0 0.35 6.1 8.0

0.50
80.0 0.29 5.2
0.40 6.0
0.30
4.0
0.20
2.0
0.10
0.00 0.0
0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0
Payload[kg]
6-74
Model B10


[kg] [G] [Hz]
8.0
0.0 0.97 8.5 1.00
2.0 0.87 6.0 7.0
4.0 0.74 6.0 0.80 6.0

Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
6.0 0.63 6.0
5.0
8.0 0.52 6.0 0.60
4.0
10.0 0.43 6.0
0.40 3.0
0.20
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
2.0
1.0 6
0.00 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Payload[kg]
Model B14


[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.80
0.0 0.77 11.2 10.0
5.0 0.60 5.7 0.70
10.0 0.47 3.8 0.60 8.0

Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.36 3.5

0.50
20.0 0.29 3.5 6.0
0.40
0.30 4.0
0.20
Acceleration[G] 2.0
0.10 Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Payload[kg]
6-75
Model B14H


[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 1.07 12.0 12.0
1.00
5.0 0.82 7.3
10.0
10.0 0.69 5.0 0.80
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
15.0 0.56 3.8 8.0
20.0 0.45 3.1 0.60
25.0 0.41 3.0 6.0
30.0 0.38 3.0 0.40
4.0
Fd-09[Hz]
2.0
0.00 0.0
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
Payload[kg]
Model R5
Moment of inertia of maximum allowable load 1.22 [kgf•cm•sec 2]

3500 14.0
Moment of
Acceleration Fd-09
inertia of load
2 [deg/sec2] [Hz]
[kgf•cm•sec ] 3000 12.0
0.00 3243 12.0
0.24 2880 6.6 2500 10.0
Acceleration[deg/sec 2 ]
0.49 2535 6.0

Fd-09[Hz]
0.73 2169 6.0 2000 8.0
0.98 1800 6.0

1500 6.0
1.22 1440 6.0
1000 4.0
500 Acceleration[deg/sec 2 ] 2.0

Fd-09[Hz]
0 0.0
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40
Moment of Inertia[kgf•cm•sec 2 ]
6-76
Model R10

4000 14.0
Moment of
Acceleration Fd-09
inertia of load
2 [deg/sec2] [Hz]
[kgf•cm•sec ] 3500 12.0
0.00 3600 12.0
3000
0.25 3429 10.8 10.0
1.24 2707 4.0 2500
Fd-09[Hz]
2.47 1800 4.0 8.0
3.71 898 4.0 2000

6.0
1500
4.0
1000
500 Acceleration[deg/sec 2 ] 2.0

6
Fd-09[Hz]
0 0.0
0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
Model R20

2500 14.0
Moment of
Acceleration Fd-09
inertia of load Acceleration[deg/sec 2 ]
[deg/sec2] [Hz]
[kgf•cm•sec2] 12.0
Fd-09[Hz]
0.00 2093 12.0 2000
0.93 2022 12.0 10.0
6.50 1622 3.0

1500
Fd-09[Hz]
12.10 1259 3.0 8.0
18.70 791 3.0

6.0
1000
4.0
500
2.0
0 0.0
0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00
6-77
■ RDP
Model MR12
Fd-00 Mover mass 0.108 [×10kg]

0.90 14.0
Acceleration[G]
[kg] [G] [Hz] 0.80
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0 0.82 12.0
0.70
1 0.48 8.4
Acceleration[G]
10.0
2 0.36 7.0 0.60
Fd-09[Hz]
3 0.29 7.0 0.50 8.0
4 0.23 7.0
0.40 6.0
5 0.20 7.0
0.30
6 0.20
4.0
2.0
0.10
0.00 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Payload[kg]
Model MR16

1.60 14.0
1.40 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0 1.34 12.0
1 0.93 11.2 1.20
Acceleration[G]
10.0
3 0.55 7.1
1.00
Fd-09[Hz]
5 0.36 6.0 8.0

7 0.31 6.0 0.80
6.0
0.60
4.0
0.40
0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Payload[kg]
6-78
Model MR16H

2.50 14.0
0 1.92 12.0 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0

2.00
1 1.36 12.0 Acceleration[G]
10.0
3 0.82 8.1
1.50
Fd-09[Hz]
5 0.55 6.1 8.0
7 0.43 6.0
9 0.35 6.0 6.0
1.00
4.0
0.50
2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0 2 4 6 8
Payload[kg]
Model MR20

2.50 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
0 2.07 12.0 2.00
Acceleration[G]
1 1.57 12.0 10.0

3 1.16 10.6
1.50
Fd-09[Hz]
5 0.96 8.4 8.0

9 0.70 6.0
6.0
15 0.52 6.0 1.00
17 0.47 6.0
4.0
0.50
2.0
0.00 0.0
0 5 10 15
Payload[kg]
6-79
Model MR25

2.00 14.0
1.80
0 1.82 12.0 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
1.60
5 0.88 9.4
Acceleration[G]
1.40 10.0
10 0.59 6.2
1.20
Fd-09[Hz]
15 0.36 5.5 8.0
20 0.29 5.5 1.00
23 0.28 5.5 6.0
0.80
0.60 4.0
6 0.40
0.20
2.0
0.00 0.0
0 5 10 15 20
Payload[kg]
Model MF7

1.20 12.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Acceleration [G]
0 1.00 11.0 1.00 10.0
Fd-09 [Hz]
2 0.67 8.5
4 0.46 7.0 0.80 8.0
Acceleration[G]
Fd-09[Hz]
6 0.37 6.0
7 0.34 6.0 0.60 6.0
0.40 4.0
0.20 2.0
0.00 0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Payload[kg]
6-80
Model MF15

2.50 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Acceleration [G] 12.0
0 1.95 12.0
2.00 Fd-09 [Hz]
5 0.77 7.1
10.0
Acceleration[G]
10 0.47 4.5
1.50
Fd-09[Hz]
15 0.30 4.5 8.0
6.0
1.00
4.0
0.50
2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Payload[kg]
Model MF20

2.50 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Acceleration[G] 12.0
0 1.95 12.0
2.00 Fd-09[Hz]
5 1.02 9.8
Acceleration[G]
10.0
10 0.62 6.3
1.50
Fd-09[Hz]
15 0.45 5.5 8.0

20 0.36 5.5
6.0
1.00
4.0
0.50
2.0
0.00 0.0
0 5 10 15 20
Payload[kg]
6-81
Model MF30

2.50 14
[kg] [G] [Hz]
Acceleration[G] 12
0 2.33 12.0
2.00 Fd-09[Hz]
10 1.06 7
Acceleration[G]
10
20 0.68 4.5
1.50
Fd-09[Hz]
30 0.51 4.5 8
6
1.00
6 0.50
2
0.00 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Payload[kg]
Model MF50

2.00 14.0
1.80
0 1.89 12.0 Fd-09[Hz] 12.0
1.60
10 0.85 10.9
Acceleration[G]
1.40 10.0
20 0.51 7.1
1.20
Fd-09[Hz]
30 0.39 6.0 8.0

40 0.30 6.0 1.00
50 0.26 6.0 6.0
0.80
0.60 4.0
0.40
2.0
0.20
0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Payload[kg]
6-82
Model MF75


2.00 14.0
[kg] [G] [Hz]
0.0 1.88 12.0 12.0
1.60 Fd-09[Hz]
1.40 10.0
50.0 0.47 4.5
1.20
Fd-09[Hz]
75.0 0.33 4.5 8.0
1.00
6.0
0.80
0.60 4.0
0.40
0.20
2.0 6
0.00 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Payload[kg]
6-83
6.4 Control block diagram and monitors

The following is the control block diagram for the robot driver, showing the relation
among parameters, input terminals, and monitors.
0OSITION COMMAND
monitor 0OSITION CONTROL
d-07 0ARAMETER .O
$IFFER -ONITOR .O

ential +PF
)NPUT TERMINAL
Position
error Fd-10
monitor 3PEED
0OSITION FEED command
Position FORWARD GAIN
d-09
error 3PEED monitor
EGR2 3PEED COMMAND d-00
6 0ULSE TRAIN
INPUT MODE
Electronic
gear
numerator/
denominator
FILTER
Firstorder
lag +PP
0HASE
COMPEN
sation
Position
control
COMMAND limiter
FILTER
&IRSTORDER
lag
FA-11 FA-12 Fd-36 Fd-09 Fd-07 FA-00 Fd-20

%LECTRONIC GEAR Position 0OSITION CONTROL 0OSITION PHASE 3PEED
s& R numerator COMMAND FILTER CUT OFF COMPENSATING s0 3 COMMAND FILTER
TIME CONSTANT FREQUENCY ratio TIME CONSTANT
s0 3 FA-13
%LECTRONIC GEAR
Fd-32 Fd-08
s! B denominator 3ECOND POSITION 0OSITION PHASE
CONTROL CUT OFF COMPENSATING
FREQUENCY TIME CONSTANT
sR &
s 0 3 Fd-33
0OSITION GAIN
sB ! CHANGE TIME
constant
0RESENT
FC-19 POSITION 3PEED LIMIT
#OMMAND PULSE monitor mode
FILTER TIME
constant d-08
3PEED
Position FA-20 detection
detection value
s NON
monitor
FA-81 d-01
0OSITION SENSOR
selection
FA-82 $IFFER 3PEED

0OSITION SENSOR ential detection
resolution
6-84
Speed control
Kspp
Torque
Fd-03 Fd-04 PPI Torque command
Speed P-control command limiter
control gain Propor- filter
integral gain tional
control First-
switching order
lag
Ksi Integral
Fd-06
Torque
1-α Ksp Torque command filter
bias time constant
mode
Fd-05
IP-control
gain
Fd-02
Speed control
Fd-00
proportional Mover mass

FA-18 Torque
limit
6
s non
gain mode
Fd-01 s CnS
Speed control
cut-off
frequency
FA-17
s non
Torque control
α Ksp
Torque command
monitor
Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2 d-03
Fd-12 Fd-14
Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2
frequency frequency
Fd-13 Fd-15
Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2
bandwidth bandwidth
6-85
MEMO
6-86
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection
This chapter explains precautions and procedures for maintaining and inspecting this product.
Contents

7.1.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection 7-2
7.1.2 Daily inspection 7-2
7.1.3 Cleaning 7-2
7.1.4 Periodic inspection 7-2
7.2 Daily inspection and periodic inspection 7-3
7.3 Megger test and breakdown voltage test 7-4
7.4 Checking the inverter and converter 7-4
7.5 Capacitor life curve 7-6
7. Maintenance and Inspection
7.1 Maintenance and inspection
w DANGER
AFTER TURNING POWER OFF, WAIT AT LEAST 10 MINUTES BEFORE STARTING
MAINTENANCE AND MAKE SURE THE CHARGE LAMP ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR
PANEL IS OFF.
c CAUTION
The capacitance of the capacitor on the power supply line drops due to
deterioration.Replacing the capacitor based on its service life curve is
recommended in order to prevent secondary damage resulting from capacitor
failure. (See section 7.5 in this chapter.)
Using a deteriorated or defective capacitor may cause malfunction.
PROHIBITED
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISASSEMBLE OR REPAIR THE UNIT OR REPLACE ANY PARTS
OF THE UNIT. ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL ARE ALLOWED TO DO REPAIR
WORK. 7
Maintenance and Inspection
7-1
7.1.1 Precautions for maintenance and inspection

(1) After turning power off, wait at least 10 minutes before starting maintenance and make
sure the charge lamp on the digital operator panel is off.
(2) Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the unit.
(3) Do not perform a megger test or voltage breakdown test on the robot driver.
7.1.2 Daily inspection

• Check for any abnormal conditions or operation such as listed below:
1. Check if the robot operates correctly according to the settings.
2. Check if the environment where the unit is installed conforms to the specifications.
3. Check the cooling system for abnormal conditions. (Control box, air filters, cooling
fans, etc.)
4. Check for abnormal vibration or noise.
5. Check for overheating or discoloration.
7 6. Check for unusual odors.
• Check the input voltage to the robot driver with a voltmeter during operation.
1. Check if power supply voltage fluctuates frequently.

2. Check if the line voltage is balanced.
7.1.3 Cleaning
• Always operate the robot driver in a clean condition.
• To clean the unit, wipe it gently with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent.
Note: Solvents such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol can dissolve the
robot driver surface or peel the paint. Do not use such solvents. Using
detergent or alcohol might damage the display panel on the digital operator.
Do not use them to clean the display panel.
7.1.4 Periodic inspection

• Check the following points or sections that cannot be inspected during operation or
that require periodic inspection.
1. Check the cooling system for abnormal conditions. ... Check the fan for operation.
2. Check the screws for tightness and retighten if necessary. ... The screws and bolts
might loosen due to vibration or temperature changes. Carefully check that they are
securely tightened.
3. Check the conductors and insulators for corrosion or damage.
4. Measure the insulation resistance.
5. Check the cooling fan and replace if necessary.
7-2
7.2 Daily inspection and periodic inspection

Check interval
Check Regular
Check item Check item Check method Criteria Instrument
point Daily 1 2
year years
Ambient temperature
should be 0°C or
Check ambient Refer to Chapter Thermometer,
Ambient more without freezing.
temperature, humidity, O 3, "Installation hygrometer,
environment Ambient humidity
dust. and Wiring". recorder
should be 90% or less
without condensation.
General
Overall Check for abnormal Visual and aural

O No abnormalities.
equipment vibration or noise. inspection
Measure the
voltage between
L1, L2 and L3 on
Check the main and Voltage should be Tester
Power supply the robot driver
control power circuit O within the specified AC and digital
voltage main circuit, and
voltage. voltage. multimeter
between L1C
and L2C on the
control circuit.
(1) Check connections O
for tightness.
(2) Check for evidence O
of overheating in (1) Retighten.
General various (2) Visual (1)(2) No abnormalities.
components. inspection
(3) Cleaning O
Note: Do not perform a
megger test.
(1) Check the
conductors for
O
7
Connection

deformation. (1)(2) Visual
conductors (1)(2) No abnormalities.
(2) Check the cable O inspection
and cables
sheath for wear or
damage.
Terminal Check the terminal
O Visual inspection No abnormalities.
block block for damage.
Disconnect the
cables from
the robot driver
Refer to the procedure
and measure
described in 7.4,
the resistance
Main circuit
"Checking the converter

between terminals
Inverter, Check resistance and inverter", in this Analog tester
O L1, L2 or L3 and
converter between terminals. chapter. or multimeter
(+) or (–), and
Typical inverter
between U, V or
replacement interval:
W and (+) or (–)
10 6 start/stop cycles.
with a tester or
multimeter of ×1
Ω range.
(1)(2) Visual
inspection (1)(2) No abnormalities.
(1) Check for liquid O (Check for Typical replacement
Smoothing
leakage. evidence of liquid intervals: 5 years
capacitor
(2) Check for bulging. O leakage and (See capacitor life
deformation of the curve.)
case.)
Check for chattering
Relay O Aural inspection No abnormalities.
noise at on/off.
Remove the
shorting bar
or wire from
control power
Error should be within
Braking Check for wire connectors B1-B2 Tester or digital
O ±10% of specified
resistor breakage. (200V class), multimeter
resistance value.
and measure
the resistance
with a tester or
multimeter.
(1) Check if the O
Indicator
(1) Visual
7-segment LED and (1) Check if the LED
inspection
Indicator charge lamp light up and lamp light up
(2) Clean with
correctly. correctly.
wiping cloth.
(2) Cleaning O
Note 1: The capacitor life is affected by ambient temperature. Refer to 7.5, "Capacitor life curve", as a general guide for
replacement.
Note 2: Refer to the robot user's manual for information regarding the robot.
7-3
7.3 Megger test and breakdown voltage test

Do not perform a megger test or voltage breakdown test. Semiconductor devices used in
the inverter main circuit may deteriorate if subjected to such a test.
7.4 Checking the inverter and converter

• Use a tester or multimeter to check whether the module will operate correctly.
[Preparation]
1. Disconnect the externally connected power cables (L1, L2, L3, L1C, L2C), motor
connection cables (U, V, W), regenerative braking resistor (+) and RB, and external
DC power supply cables (+) and (–).
2. Prepare an analog tester or multimeter. (Use the 1-ohm resistance measurement
range.)
[Check method]
7 Measure the continuity at L1, L2, L3, U, V, W, RB, (+), and (–) on the robot driver
terminal block by alternately changing the polarity on the tester to determine if module
operation is satisfactory.
Note 1: First, measure the voltage across the (+) and (–) terminals on the terminal
block of the robot driver by using the DC voltage range on the multimeter to
make sure the smoothing capacitor is fully discharged. Then switch the
multimeter to measure resistance and start making the checks.
Note 2: In the non-conducting state, the reading should be nearly infinite. However,
the reading might not be infinite due to momentary conduction caused by
effects of the smoothing capacitor. In a conducting state, the reading is
usually several to several dozen ohms.
The reading might not always be the same depending on the device type and
tester. However, the reading is satisfactory if equal to other values.
Note 3: Remove the cables from (+) and (–) on the main circuit terminal block (all
models) and also remove the shorting bar or wire connected across terminals
B1 and B2.
Note 4: The robot driver has an internal DB circuit between the main circuit
terminals U and W, so the reading measured across the main circuit terminals
is different from those shown in the table.
7-4
Tester polarity *1 Converter (+)1(+) RB Inverter

Reading TR1 TR2 TR3
(red) (black) D1 D2 D3
L1 (+)1 Non-conducting L1
D1 U
(+)1 L1 Conducting L2
C+ V
L2 (+)1 Non-conducting L3
D2 TR7 W
(+)1 L2 Conducting
L3 (+)1 Non-conducting D4 D5 D6
Converter
D3 TR4 TR5 TR6

(+)1 L3 Conducting (–)
L1 (−) Conducting *1: Tester polarity may have to be reversed
D4
(−) L1 Non-conducting depending on the tester or multimeter type.
L2 (−) Conducting
D5
(−) L2 Non-conducting
L3 (−) Conducting
D6
(−) L3 Non-conducting
TR1
U
(+)
V
(+)
U
(+)
Non-conducting
Conducting
Non-conducting
7

TR2
(+) V Conducting
W (+) Non-conducting
TR3
Inverter
(+) W Conducting
U (−) Conducting
TR4
(−) U Non-conducting
V (−) Conducting
TR5
(−) V Non-conducting
W (−) Conducting
TR6
(−) W Non-conducting
RB (+) Non-conducting
BR section
(+) RB Conducting
TR7
RB (−) Non-conducting
(−) RB Non-conducting
7-5
7.5 Capacitor life cur ve

Ambient
temperature
(°C)
50
12-hour daily operation
40
30
20
10 24-hour daily operation
-10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Capacitor life (year)
7 Note 1: Ambient temperature is the temperature around the robot driver.

When the robot driver is housed in a box, it is the temperature in the box.
Note 2: The smoothing capacitor wears out due to internal chemical reaction and
should usually be replaced at 5 year intervals. Note, however, that the
capacitor life will shorten drastically if the ambient temperature of the robot
driver is high.
Note 3: Replacing the smoothing capacitor is not easy due to the robot driver
structure. If servicing is needed, please contact our sales office or sales
representative.
7-6
Chapter 8 Specifications and Dimensions
This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of this product.
Contents
8.1 Specification tables 8-1

8.1.1 RDP specification table 8-1
8.1.2 RDX specification table 8-2
8.2 Robot driver dimensions and mounting holes 8-3
8. Specifications and Dimensions
8.1 Specification tables
8.1.1 RDP specification table

Robot driver
RDP-05 RDP-10 RDP-20 RDP-25
Item
Applicable motor specifications 200V, 100W or less 200V, 200W or less 200V, 400W or less 200V, 750W or less
Power supply capacity
0.3 0.5 0.9 1.3
(KVA)
Basic specifications
Input power supply

Three-phase 200 to 230V AC +10%, –15%, 50/60Hz ± 5%
(main circuit)
Input power supply
Single-phase 200 to 230V AC +10%, –15%, 50/60Hz ± 5%
(control circuit)
(Note
Maximum speed (min/s)
6) 3.0
(Note 3)
Protective structure Open type (IP00)
Control system Sine-wave PWM (pulse width modulation)
Control mode Position control
Position detection method Magnetic linear scale
Line driver signal (2M pulses/s or less)
(1) Forward pulse + reverse pulse (2) Sign pulse + Command pulse
Position command input (3) 90-degree phase difference 2-phase pulse command (maximum frequency:
500k pulses/s.)
Input/output functions
One of (1) to (3) is selectable.

24V DC contact point signal input (usable for sink/source) (24V DC power supply
Input signal
incorporated)
(1) Servo ON (2) Alarm reset (3) Torque limit (4) Forward overtravel
(5) Reverse overtravel (6) Origin sensor (Note 5) (7) Return-to-origin
(8)Pulse train input enable (9) Deviation counter clear
8
Specifications and Dimensions

Open collector signal output (usable for sink/source)
Output signal
(1) Servo ready (2) Alarm (3) Positioning complete
Phase A, B signal output: Line driver signal output
Phase Z signal output: Line driver signal output / open collector signal output
signal output
N/8192 (N=1 to 8191), 1/N (N=1 to 64) or 2/N (N=3 to 64)
Selectable items: 2 ch, 0 to ±3V voltage output, speed detection value, torque
Monitor output
command, etc.
Built-in operator 5-digit number indicator, key input × 5
Connectable to PC running on Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT/2000/XP
External operator
(via RS-232C port)
Regenerative braking circuit Built-in (without a braking resistor) Built-in
Internal functions
Built-in (operating
condition settable)
(Note 4) Built-in (operating condition settable)
Dynamic brake (with DB resistor,
(without DB resistor, wiring: 2-phase short circuit)
wiring: 2-phase
short circuit)
Overcurrent, overload, braking resistor overload, main circuit overvoltage, memory
error, main circuit undervoltage, CT error, CPU error 1, ground fault detection at
servo ON, control circuit undervoltage, robot driver temperature error, CPU error 2,
Protective function overtravel error, PM error, resolver error, mismatch error, position deviation error,
speed deviation error, overspeed error, drive range error, position monitor timeout
error, magnetic pole position estimation error, magnetic pole position estimation
incomplete
Ambient temperature/
Environment
0 to +40°C / –10 to +70°C

storage temperature (Note 1)
Humidity 20 to 90% RH or less (no condensation)
(Note 2)
Vibration 5.9m/s 2 (0.6G) 10 to 55Hz
Installation location 1000 meters or less above sea level, indoor place (free from corrosive gas and dust)
Approximate mass (kg) 0.8 1.0 1.4
Note 1:
Storage temperature is the short-term temperature during transport.
Note 2:
Conforms to JIS C0040 testing method.
Note 3:
Protective system conforms to JEM1030.
Note 4:
Use the dynamic brake only for emergency stop. Braking effect might be small depending on robot type.
Note 5:
As the origin sensor, GX-F8B (made by SUNX) or FL7M-1P5B6-Z (made by YAMATAKE) is used. Origin sensor
current consumption is 15mA or less (at open output) and only 1 origin sensor is connected to 1 robot driver.
Note 6: Calculated from parameters for controlling robot driver. This is not the maximum speed that the robot will move.
8-1
8.1.2 RDX specification table

Robot driver
RDX-05 RDX-10 RDX-20
Item
Applicable motor
200V, 100W or less 200V, 200W or less 200V, 400W or less
specifications
Power supply capacity (KVA) 0.3 0.5 0.9
Input power supply
Basic specifications
Three-phase 200 to 230V AC +10%, –15%, 50/60Hz ± 5%

(main circuit)
Input power supply
Single-phase 200 to 230V AC +10%, –15%, 50/60Hz ± 5%
(control circuit)
Brake power input 24V DC ± 10%
Maximum speed (min -1) 5000
(Note 3)
Protective structure Open type (IP00)
Control system Sine-wave PWM (pulse width modulation)
Control mode Position control
Position detection method Resolver
Line driver signal (2M pulses/s or less)
(1) Forward pulse + reverse pulse (2) Sign pulse + Command pulse
Position command input (3) 90-degree phase difference 2-phase pulse command (maximum frequency:
500k pulses/s.)
One of (1) to (3) is selectable.
Input/output functions
24V DC contact point signal input (usable for sink/source) (24V DC power
supply incorporated)
Input signal (1) Servo ON (2) Alarm reset (3) Torque limit (4) Forward overtravel
(5) Reverse overtravel (6) Origin sensor (Note 5) (7) Return-to-origin
8 Output signal
Relay output signal

(8)Pulse train input enable (9) Deviation counter clear
Open collector signal output (usable for sink/source)
(1) Servo ready (2) Alarm (3) Positioning complete
Brake release signal (24V, 375mA)
Phase A, B signal output: Line driver signal output

Phase Z signal output: Line driver signal output / open collector signal output
signal output
N/8192 (N=1 to 8191), 1/N (N=1 to 64) or 2/N (N=3 to 64)
Selectable items: 2ch, 0 to ±3V voltage output, speed detection value, torque
Monitor output
command, etc.
Built-in operator 5-digit number indicator, key input × 5
Connectable to PC running on Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT/2000/XP (via
External operator
RS-232C port)
Internal functions
Regenerative braking circuit Built-in (without a braking resistor) Built-in

(Note 4) Built-in (operating condition settable)
Dynamic brake
(without DB resistor, wiring: 2-phase short circuit)
Overcurrent, overload, braking resistor overload, main circuit overvoltage,
memory error, main circuit undervoltage, CT error, CPU error 1, ground fault
detection at servo ON, control circuit undervoltage, robot driver temperature
Protective function
error, CPU error 2, overtravel error, PM error, resolver error, mismatch error,
position deviation error, speed deviation error, overspeed error, drive range
error, position monitor timeout error, origin sensor error
Ambient temperature/ storage
0 to +40°C / –10 to +70°C
temperature (Note 1)
Environment
Humidity 20 to 90% RH or less (no condensation)

(Note 2)
Vibration 5.9m/s 2 (0.6G) 10 to 55Hz
1000 meters or less above sea level, indoor place (free from corrosive gas and
Installation location
dust)
Approximate mass (kg) 0.8 1.0
Note 1: Storage temperature is the short-term temperature during transport.

Note 2: Conforms to JIS C0040 testing method.
Note 3: Protective system conforms to JEM1030.
Note 4: Use the dynamic brake only for emergency stop.
Note 5: As the origin sensor, GX-F8B (made by SUNX) or FL7M-1P5B6-Z (made by YAMATAKE) is used. Origin sensor
current consumption is 15mA or less (at open output) and only 1 origin sensor is connected to 1 robot driver.
(Future specifications)
8-2
8.2 Robot driver dimensions and mounting holes

Model name Model No. Drawing
RDP-05 Fig. 1
RDP RDP-10 Fig. 1

(For PHASER series) RDP-20 Fig. 2
RDP-25 Fig. 3
RDX-05 Fig. 1
RDX
RDX-10 Fig. 1
(For FLIP-X series)
RDX-20 Fig. 2
Fig. 1
8-3
Fig. 2
8
Fig. 3
７０
（１４）５６（７５）１７０
φ６
５
１５０±０．５（＊）
ＦＵＮＣ
ＣＨＡＲＧＥＳＥＴ
（＋）１ＰＣ
１６０
（＋）
ＲＢ
Ｉ／Ｏ
（−）
Ｌ１
Ｌ２
Ｌ３
Ｕ
（１６）
ＥＮＣ
（５）
６
NAME PLATE
MAIN TERMINAL
CONNECTOR OF CONTROL SUPPLY
（４）
（＊）MOUNTING HOLE PITCH
8-4 DIMENSION in mm
Terminal block and mounting hole drawing
Output W D1
100W
200W
400W
57
65
5
9
8

750W 70 14
8-5
MEMO
8-6
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the protective functions, alarm display, and troubleshooting of this product.
Contents
9.1 Alarm display (alarm log) 9-1

9.2 Protective function list 9-2
9.3 Troubleshooting 9-3
9.3.1 When an alarm or error has not tripped 9-3
9.3.2 When an alarm or error has tripped 9-5
9. Troubleshooting
9.1 Alarm display (alarm log)

If an alarm has tripped, a display like that shown below appears.
The trip log monitor d-12 also shows the same information.
Alarm code Alarm number
Display Description
Alarm code (error number) See section 9.2 in this chapter.
1 to 4: Number "1" is the latest alarm. A total
Alarm number
of four alarms are saved in the memory.
The following information is displayed by pressing the key.

Information Description
Speed command value Speed command value when alarm tripped
Speed detection value when alarm tripped
Speed detection value
(decimal display)
Output current value Output current value when alarm tripped
DC voltage value between (+) and (–)

DC bus voltage between (+) and (–) when
alarm tripped
9
Troubleshooting
Input terminal information See the description of d-05.
Output terminal information See the description of d-06.
The above example shows that an overcurrent alarm has tripped or the latest alarm log is
an overcurrent.
9-1
9. Troubleshooting
9.2 Protective function list

The table below shows alarms and errors that might occur to protect the robot driver and robot.
No. Alarm name Alarm code Description (cause of error)
1 Overcurrent E01 Motor current higher than the specified value
2 Overload E05 Overload current for longer than the specified time
Braking resistor The duty ratio of internal regenerative braking resistor exceeded the
3 E06
overload specified duty ratio (FA-08).
Main power
4 E07 Main circuit DC bus voltage exceeded the specified value.
overvoltage
A check sum error occurred in the internal EEPROM of the robot driver due
5 Memory error E08
to external noise or abnormal temperature rise.
Main power Main circuit DC bus voltage dropped below the specified value during
6 E09
undervoltage servo-on.
An abnormal offset value or out-of-range output value appeared in current
7 CT error E10
detection CT output during servo-off.
8 CPU error 1 E11 A CPU watchdog error occurred.
9 Ground fault E14 A motor output ground fault occurred when the servo was switched from OFF to ON.
The servo was turned off due to the control power supply voltage dropping
Control power
10 E20 below the specified value and the power then recovered before internal
undervoltage
reset.
Abnormal
11 E21 Power module temperature in the robot driver increased to abnormal levels.
temperature
12 CPU error 2 E22 A communication error with the CPU.
Both FOT and ROT were simultaneously enabled for 1 second or more
13 Overtravel error E25
during servo-on.
Power module Overcurrent was detected by the power module, or power supply voltage
14 E31
9 error (Note 1) for the base circuit dropped.

The following error was detected during constant monitoring.
RDX: An error was detected by the ERR signal for the R/D converter.
RDP: An error was detected by the wire breakage detection circuit signal
Position sensor
Troubleshooting
15 E39 for the resolver.

signal error
Or, in the case of the RDP, an error occurred due to wire breakage detected
by the "position sensor wire breaking detection" function which works when
FA-90 (Hall sensor connection) is set to "oFF2".
Motor power Motor output or supply voltage does not match the robot driver.
16 E40
mismatch This error cannot be cleared from the RS (alarm reset) terminal.
The difference between the position command value and the position
17 Position error fault E83
detection value is larger than the "Position error detection value" (FA-05).
The difference between the speed command value and the speed detection
18 Speed error fault E84
value is larger than the "Speed error detection value" (FA-04).
Detection speed increased over the specified speed (maximum speed ×
19 Overspeed error E85
FA-03).
20 Driving range error E88 Position detection value was outside the specified range (Fb-16 to Fb-19).
Position Time required for the position error to enter positioning range after a position
21 monitoring timeout E89 command value reached a certain position exceeded the "Positioning
error interval time limit" (Fb-24).
Magnetic pole
22 position estimation E95 Magnetic pole position estimation failed.
error (Note 2)
When in FA-90=oFF, the servo was turned on without performing any
Magnetic pole magnetic pole position estimation after power-on.
23 position estimation E96 When in FA-90=oFF, the SON terminal was turned on with the RS terminal
incomplete (Note 2) turned on, in order to start mechanical system diagnosis or offline auto-
tuning.
After starting return-to-origin with the "Homing mode" (FA-23) set to "S-F"
or "S-r" (sensor method) while the sensor (ORL terminal) was 0=ON, the
24 Origin sensor error E80
ORL terminal did not turn off even when the robot moved a distance of
50,000 pulses or more.
Note 1: To clear the tripped alarm, shut off the power.
9-2
9. Troubleshooting
9.3 Troubleshooting
Corrective action for an alarm or error differs depending on whether the alarm or error
has tripped or not. Each case is explained below.
9.3.1 When an alarm or error has not tripped

Symptom Possible cause Checkpoint Action
Rated voltage was not • Check the voltage with a tester. Correct failure or miswiring
applied to power supply • Check the earth leakage breaker of the earth leakage breaker,
terminals L1, L2, and winding, electromagnetic contactor, etc. electromagnetic contactor, etc.,
L3, or L1C and L2C. Also check if any alarm has tripped. or clear the tripped alarm.
Robot driver power After checking the above, check if the If the charge lamp does not light
input section is charge lamp lights up. up, the robot driver is defective.
defective. Replace or repair the robot
driver.
Miswiring or poor Check the phase sequence or contact Correct the phase sequence or
connection to robot failure. misconnection.
SON terminal is not • Check if the SON terminal is ON, by • Turn on the SON terminal.
ON. (Wrong polarity) viewing the input terminal monitor d-05.
• Check the polarity setting. • Correct the polarity setting.
Torque limit is in effect. • Check if the TL terminal is ON, by • Turn off the TL terminal.
(Wrong polarity) viewing the input terminal monitor d-05.
• Check if the setting is correct. • Correct the polarity setting.
• Correct the torque limit setting.
FOT and ROT terminals • Check if the FOT and ROT terminals • Turn on the FOT and ROT
are not ON. (Wrong are ON, by viewing the input terminal terminals.
polarity) monitor d-05.
Robot does
No pulse train
command was input
• Check the polarity setting.
• Check if the command is input, by
viewing the Position command monitor
• Correct the polarity setting.
• Input the pulse train command.
• Change the command format to
9
during position control d-07. match the input pulse train.
Troubleshooting
not move.
mode. • Check if the setting is correct.
(Incorrect command • Is the electronic gear ratio too low to • Set the electronic gear ratio
format setting or wrong see any robot movement? correctly.
polarity) • Is the command position input pulse • Increase the pulse rate.
train rate is too low?
PEN terminal is not ON • Check if the PEN terminal is ON, by • Turn on the PEN terminal.
during position control viewing the input terminal monitor d-05.
mode. (Wrong polarity) • Check if the setting is correct. • Correct the polarity setting.
Robot is locked. (Brake Check the lock. Release the shaft.
is activated.)
Servo was not turned • Check if the servo was turned on Turn on the servo after the robot
on immediately after immediately after DB. speed becomes 0.5% or less of
DB, before the robot • Check if the robot speed was 0.5% or the rated speed.
speed dropped below less of the rated speed when the servo
0.5% of the rated was turned on.
speed. (When using a
robot driver of 5kW or
more)
Robot driver failure • Make sure this is not due to the above If the robot driver is defective,
(Position sensor causes. replace or repair it.
failure) • Check the power module. (Refer to
Chapter 7, "Maintenance and
Inspection".)
9-3
9. Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible cause Checkpoint Action
Large load variation • Check the load variation. • Reduce the load variation.
• Check the capacity calculation. • Increase the capacity.
Large backlash of the Check the backlash. Reduce the backlash.
mechanical system
Improper control gain Check the parameter settings. Readjust the control gain.
Signal cable or position Check the routing of the signal cable and Separate the signal cable and
sensor cable intersects position sensor cable. position sensor cable from the
the main circuit cable. main circuit cable.
(These are in the same
Robot cable duct.)
motion is
unstable. Shield wire of the Check the shield wire connection on Connect the shield wire of the
position sensor cable is position sensor cable. position sensor cable correctly.
not connected.
Robot driver failure • Check the power module. (Refer to If the robot driver is defective,
(Position sensor Chapter 7, "Maintenance and replace or repair it.
failure) Inspection".)
• Check the position count function, by
viewing the present position monitor
d-08.
Offline auto-tuning Check if the "Auto tuning mode" (FA-10) Set FA-10 to "non".
mode is set. parameter is set to "non".
Speed limit is applied. • Check the parameter settings (Fb-20 Set the speed limit value
and Fb-21). correctly.
Torque limit is in effect. • Check if the TL terminal is ON, by • Disconnect the TL terminal.
(Wrong polarity) viewing the Input terminal monitor d-05.
• Check if the setting is correct. • Correct the polarity setting.
Robot • Correct the torque limit setting.
9 speed
does not
increase.
Incorrect command
speed setting
Improper control gain

Check the speed command input by
viewing the Monitor d-00.
Check if hunting occurs.

Correct the command setting.
Readjust the control gain.

Troubleshooting
Load is heavy. • Check the load. • Reduce the load.

• Check the calculated capacity. • Increase the capacity.
Brake is applied to the Check the brake. Release the brake.
robot.
9-4
9. Troubleshooting
9.3.2 When an alarm or error has tripped

When an alarm or error has tripped, clear the alarm or error by inputting a reset signal
through the RS terminal and take corrective action as shown in the following table. Then
turn the servo on. (For clearing the tripped alarm, refer to the RS terminal description in
section 5.2, "Input terminal functions".)
Alarm
Alarm name Possible cause Checkpoint Action Reset
No.
• Output terminal is Check the cable connection. Correct the cable
shorted. connection.
• Ground fault
• Incorrect motor phase
sequence
Sudden motor lock Check the load. Adjust the brake timing to A
avoid a lock.
• Power supply voltage Check the power supply Correct the power supply
is low. voltage. (Check the power voltage, capacity, and
• Power supply supply capacity.) wiring.
fluctuates.
E01 Overcurrent Position sensor failure Check the count by viewing If defective, replace or
the present position monitor repair it. C
(d-08).
Power (inverter) Check the power module.
module is damaged. (Refer to Chapter 7,
"Maintenance and
Inspection".)
DB relay failure Disconnect the motor A
cables from the robot driver
and check the resistance
between U, V and W, using
an ohmmeter or multimeter.
9
Check the load.
Troubleshooting
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. B
Motor is locked. Adjust the brake timing to

C
avoid a lock.
Incorrect robot phase Check the cable connection. Correct the cable
E05 Overload A
sequence connection.
Robot's position sensor Check if the counter If the sensor is defective,
failure correctly works, by viewing replace or repair it.
C
the present position monitor
d-08.
Regenerative load is Check the regenerative • Reduce the load.
too heavy. load. • Shorten the deceleration
Balance weight is so time.
large that continuous A
regeneration is applied.
Insufficient Review the regenerative
Braking regenerative capacity resistance.
E06 resistor
Deceleration time is too Check if an alarm tripped Increase the deceleration
overload B
short. during deceleration. time.
Power supply voltage Check the power supply Adjust the power supply
A
is high. voltage. voltage correctly.
Regenerative braking Check if the duty ratio Set a correct duty ratio.
operating ratio is set to matches the regenerative B
a small value. resistance.
Letters in the Reset column:

A: Shut off the power to the robot driver, perform troubleshooting, replace or repair defective parts.
B: After the robot stops, wait until the robot driver cools. Then short RS to P24, and perform troubleshooting.
C: After the robot stops, short RS to P24, and perform troubleshooting or shut off the power.
9-5
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
Regenerative Check the regenerative Reduce the regenerative
resistance is large. resistance. resistance to the
minimum (R BRmin). (Refer A
to (3) of section 3.2.2,
"Main circuit wiring".
Deceleration time is too Check the deceleration Increase the deceleration
short. time. time.
Robot was put into Check if the robot was Adjust the position/speed C
Main power hunting and momentary placed in hunting (abnormal control gain correctly.
E07
overvoltage regeneration occurred. noise).
Regenerative resistor Check the regenerative • Connect the
is not connected, or is resistor connection or the regenerative resistor
open or damaged. regenerative resistance. correctly.
• Replace the
regenerative resistor. A
Received power voltage • Check the power supply • Reduce the voltage.
is too high or a ground voltage.
fault has occurred. • Check the connection. • Correct the connection.
Sum error in the Check if all settings for the • After clearing the
internal EEPROM of robot driver are correct. tripped alarm, return the
robot driver parameters to the
factory settings, and C
then restart operation.
• If defective, replace or
Memory repair it.
E08
error An EEPROM write or • Check if any noise source • Remove the noise
read error was caused exists near the robot source.
by noise. driver. • After clearing the
9 • Check if the set values

are correct.
tripped alarm, return the
parameters to the
factory settings, and
then restart operation.
A
Troubleshooting
Main circuit power Check the power supply Increase the power
C
supply voltage is low. system. supply voltage.
A unit in the power Isolate the power supply
supply system is system into separate
drawing a heavy units and the robot driver.
current that lowers the
voltage while that unit
is operating.
Chattering occurs in Replace the
the electromagnetic electromagnetic
contactor on power contactor. A
Main power supply side.
E09
undervoltage
Poor connection in Repair the poor
power supply system connection.
Insufficient power Provide larger power
supply capacity supply capacity.
Only control power Connect wiring to the
supply is provided. main circuit.
• Main circuit power Check if the symptom After clearing the tripped
supply voltage is shown at left has occurred. alarm, restart operation.
lowered. C
• A momentary power
failure occurred.

9-6
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
• Current detector Turn off and on the power If the CT is defective,
failure supply again. contact us for repair.
E10 CT error • Current detector Check if there is any noise Isolate the noise source A
malfunction caused source near the robot away from the robot
by noise driver. driver.
Microcomputer in robot Check if there is any noise • Isolate the noise source
driver is out of control source (including a solenoid away from the robot
due to noise. coil and electromagnetic driver.
contactor) near the robot • Install a noise filter or
E11 CPU error 1 driver. surge absorber. A
Turn off and on the power If the CPU is defective,

supply again and check the contact us for repair.
condition.
A ground fault occurred Disconnect the cables and Correct the ground fault
in the robot or between check the ground fault point point.
Ground fault the robot and robot by megger test.
E14 A
at servo-on driver.
Robot driver is at fault. Contact us for repair.
Control circuit power Check the power supply Increase the power
C
supply voltage is low. system. supply voltage.
A unit in the power Isolate the power supply
supply system is system into separate
drawing a heavy units and the robot driver.
current that lowers the
voltage while that unit
is operating.
Chattering in Replace the
electromagnetic electromagnetic A
9
Control
E20 power contactor on power contactor.
undervoltage supply side
Poor connection in Repair the poor
Troubleshooting
power supply system connection.
Insufficient power Provide larger power
supply capacity supply capacity.
Control circuit power Check if the symptom After clearing the tripped
supply voltage is shown at left has occurred. alarm, restart operation.
lowered. C
A momentary power
failure occurred.
The load is too heavy. Check the load. • Clear the tripped alarm
Ambient temperature Check the ambient after the robot driver
temperature. cools down, or lower the B or C
of robot driver is higher
than 55°C. ambient temperature.
Robot driver
E21
overheat Motor shaft is locked. Visual check. Unlock the motor.
The duty ratio of the Check the regenerative Use an external braking A
built-in regenerative capacity. resistor.
braking resistor is high.

9-7
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
Microcomputer in Check if there is any noise • Isolate the noise source
robot driver cannot source (including a solenoid away from the robot
communicate due to coil and electromagnetic driver.
noise. contactor) near the robot • Install a noise filter or
E22 CPU error 2 driver. surge absorber. A
Problem in Turn off and on the power If the circuit is defective,

communication circuit supply again and check the contact us for repair.
condition.
Wrong terminal Check the cable connection. Correct the cable
A
connection connection.
E25 Overtravel FOT/ROT terminals Check if the FOT/ROT Turn on both or at least
were not ON (closed) terminals are ON, by one terminal of the FOT
C
at servo-on. viewing the Input terminal and ROT terminals.
monitor d-05.
Output terminal is Check the cable connection. Correct the cable
shorted. connection.
A ground fault has
occurred.
Robot phase sequence
is incorrect.
Sudden motor lock Check the load. Adjust the brake timing to
avoid a lock.
PM (power Power supply voltage Check the power supply Correct the power supply
E31 module) is low. voltage. (Check the power voltage, capacity, and A
error Power supply supply capacity.) wiring.
fluctuates.
Position sensor failure Check if the count is correct If defective, contact us
by viewing the present for repair.
9 Power (inverter)
module is damaged.
position monitor (d-08).
Check the power module.
(Refer to Chapter 7,
"Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Inspection".)
Wire breakage or poor Check the cable, connector, Correct the wire breakage
connector mating of shield wire, and ground or connector mating.
position sensor cable. wire.
Inadequate cable Strengthen the shielding
shielding or ground and grounding.
wire.
Position sensor cable Isolate the position
is routed along power sensor cable away from
cable. the power cable.
Position
E39 Malfunction caused by Check if there is any noise Isolate the noise source A
sensor error
noise source nearby. away from the robot
driver.
Position sensor failure While moving the motor If the sensor is defective,
shaft with servo turned off, contact us for repair.
check if the Current position
counter (d-08) changes.
Position sensor was Check whether the sensor Turn on the power while
not connected when was connected before the position sensor is
power was turned on. power-on. connected.

9-8
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
Robot driver output Check the position sensor Connect the position
does not match the cable connection. sensor cable correctly
robot. and select a correct
Voltage levels of robot robot and robot driver
and robot driver do not combination.
Mismatch
E40 match. A
error
Position sensor Check the parameters Correct the parameter
combination is wrong. (FA-81, FA-82). settings.
Position sensor division Check the parameters Correct the parameter
ratio is wrong. (FC-09, FC-10). settings.
Origin sensor is not Check if the ORL terminal • Turn on the ORL
Origin sensor operating correctly. is ON by viewing the Input terminal.
E80
error terminal monitor d-05. • Replace the origin
sensor.
Pulse position Check the position Lower the pulse position
command rate is too command input rate. command rate.
fast.
Electronic gear setting Set the electronic gear
is incorrect. correctly (reduce the
ratio).
Control gain does not Check the setting. Adjust the control gain. C
match.
Speed or torque limiter Set (increase) the speed
is too low. or torque limiter correctly.
Position
E83 deviation Position error detection Set (increase) the
error level setting is too position error detection
small. level correctly.
Malfunction caused by
noise
• Check if there is any noise
source nearby.
• Check the routing of the
• Isolate the noise source
away from the drive.
• Strengthen the shielding
9
cable, connectors, shield and grounding.
Troubleshooting
wire, and ground wire. • Isolate the position A
sensor cable away from
the power cable.
Moment of load inertia Check relation of load to Reduce the load.
is too heavy. position command rate.
Speed command input Check the setting. Correct the input setting.
setting is incorrect.
Control gain does not Adjust the control gain.
match.
Torque limiter is too Correct (increase) the C
low. torque limiter.
Speed error detection Correct (increase) the
Speed level setting is too speed error detection
E84 deviation small. value.
error Malfunction caused by • Check if there is any noise • Isolate the noise source
noise source nearby. away from the drive.
• Check the routing of the • Strengthen the shielding
cable, connectors, shield and grounding.
wire, and ground wire. • Isolate the position A
sensor cable away from
the power cable.
Moment of load inertia Check relation of load to Reduce the load.
is too heavy. position command rate.

9-9
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
Speed command input Check the setting. Correct the input setting.
setting is wrong.
match.
Torque limiter is too Correct (increase) the C
low. torque limiter correctly.
Overspeed error Set the overspeed error
detection level setting detection level correctly
is too low. (increase).
Malfunction caused by • Check if there is any noise • Isolate the noise source
noise source nearby. away from the drive.
Overspeed • Check the routing of the • Strengthen the shielding
E85 cable, connectors, shield and grounding.
error
wire, and ground wire. • Isolate the position
sensor cable away from A
the power cable.
Moment of load inertia Check if overshooting has Reduce the load.
is too heavy. occurred.
Wrong motor cable Check the connection. Correct the connection.
connection
Position sensor failure While rotating the motor If the sensor is defective,
shaft, check if the display contact us for repair.
on the present position C
monitor d-08 changes
sequentially.
• Pulse train position Check the master control After removing the cause
command was unit. of trouble, clear the
mistakenly input. tripped alarm and restart
9 • Origin position is
wrong.
• Operated outside the
operation. A
drive range.
Troubleshooting
Needs larger operating Check if a load moved the • Review the setting
Drive range margin outside the robot near the drive range outside the drive range.
E88 drive range limit. • Adjust or remove the
error
load so that it will not
move the robot.
Electronic gear setting Check the control device. Correct the setting. C
is incorrect.
Torque limiter is too
low.
match.

9-10
9. Troubleshooting
Alarm
No.
Control gain, Check the setting. Adjust each setting.
Positioning detection
range (Fb-23), or wrong
positioning interval
time-limit setting
(Fb-24). C
Electronic gear setting Correct the setting.
Position is wrong.
E89 monitoring Robot is locked. Check the load. • Unlock the robot.
timeout error • Adjust the brake release
timing.
Load is larger than the • Reduce the load.
estimated level. • Increase the robot and A
robot driver capacity.
Torque limiter is in Check the TL terminal and • Disconnect the TL
effect. setting. terminal. C
• Change the setting.
Related parameter Check the parameter Correct the parameter
settings are incorrect. (FA-82, FA-85, FA-87, settings.
Fd-00) settings.
Parameter settings for Torque during magnetic Adjust Fb-40 through
magnetic pole position pole position estimation is Fb-43 to make the
estimation (Fb-40 small. generated torque larger.
through Fb-43) are Torque during magnetic Adjust Fb-40 through
incorrect. pole position estimation is Fb-43 to eliminate the
limited. torque limit.
Magnetic Movement direction Check the FOT and ROT • Turn on the FOT and
during magnetic pole terminal conditions. ROT terminals.
E95
pole position
estimation
error
position estimation is
limited by FOT and
ROT terminals.
• Change the FC-01
setting.
A
9
Troubleshooting
Rotor was moved by Check if external force is • Remove the external
external force during applied. force.
magnetic pole position
estimation.
Position sensor failure While rotating the motor If the sensor is defective
shaft, check if the display (display does not
on the present position change), contact us for
monitor d-08 changes repair.
sequentially.
Any magnetic pole Check that the SRD Perform magnetic pole
Magnetic
position estimation terminal is ON. position estimation.
pole position
E96 operation was not A
estimation
performed after power-
incomplete
on.
Operation was Check if FA-10 is set to Turn off the SON
performed in offline "non". terminal, turn the RS
Auto-tuning auto-tuning mode. terminal on and off, and
_ _Err C
error then check that FA-10 is
Moment of load inertia Check the moment of load
exceeded 128 times. inertia. set to "non".

9-11
MEMO
9-12
Chapter 10 Appendix
This chapter explains the options for this product.
Contents
10.1 Options 10-1

10.2 Recommended peripheral devices 10-5
10.3 Internal block diagram of robot driver 10-11
10. Appendix
10.1 Options
(1) Dedicated software for YAMAHA RD series (TOP for Windows)
When the RD series robot driver is connected to a PC, the TOP software allows you to
set parameters, monitor the position/speed/torque settings, and display graphics. The
TOP software runs on Windows and offers user-friendly operation.
■ System requirements
Item Condition
IBM PC compatible computer
Memory: 32MB or more
PC
Free hard disc space : 30MB or more
Monitor resolution: 800 × 600 or higher recommended.
OS Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP
PC cable KBH-M538F-00
■ Monitoring function ■ Parameter setting

Monitors operation information and Allows setting, saving and loading
terminal status in real time. parameters from the PC.
10
■ Operation trace function ■ Test run and adjustment

Appendix
This function graphically displays the Supports useful functions such as
robot speed and motor current, etc. test run, jog operation and offline
auto-tuning, etc.
10-1
10. Appendix
(2) Cables
■ PC cable
Length L Description
Robot driver side PC side
Wiring and pin
2m assignment are
shown below.
8-pin modular connector 9-pin D-Sub connector
Connection of PC cable
1 Robot driver side PC side

1 GND 1 DCD
2 2 RxD
3 3 TxD
4 ER2 4 DTR
5 SD 5 GND
8 6 RD 6 DSR
8-pin modular 7 DR 7 RTS
connector 8 RS 8 CTS
9 –
8 pins 9 pins
10
Appendix
10-2
10. Appendix
(3) Braking resistor RBR1 (small type)

■ Dimensions (mm)
■ Circuit diagram ■ Connection diagram

Robot driver Braking resistor
1
2
P (+) P 1 Alarm contact
(Normally closed)
RB
RB RB 2 Normally ON
Rated Allowable braking ratio Allowable continuous Mass

Model No. Resistance
wattage (%ED) braking time (kg)
KBH-M5850-00 120W 100Ω 2.5% (1.5%)* 12 sec. 0.27 10
* : Value in ( ) indicates the allowable braking ratio for 400V class.
Appendix
Note 1: Internal thermal contact capacity is 250V AC, 2A max. This is normally ON
(normally closed).
Note 2: Internal thermal fuse prevents excessive heat generation which may occur
due to misoperation. (Unrecoverable)
Note 3: When the thermal relay has been activated, stop the robot driver or increase
the deceleration time to reduce the regenerative energy.
10-3
10. Appendix
(4) Braking resistor RBR2 (standard type)

■ Dimensions (mm)
■ Circuit diagram ■ Connection diagram

Robot driver Braking resistor
1
2
P (+) P 1 Alarm contact
RB (Normally closed)
RB RB 2 Normally ON
Dimensions (mm)
Model No. Mass (kg)
L1 L2 L3 H1 H2 W T
10 KBH-M5850-10 310 295 160 67 12 64 1.6 0.97

Appendix
Rated Allowable braking ratio Allowable continuous

Model No. Resistance
wattage (%ED) braking time
KBH-M5850-10 200W 100Ω 7.5% (3%)* 30 sec.
* : Value in ( ) indicates the allowable braking ratio for 400V class.
Note 1: Internal thermal contact capacity is 250V AC, 2A max. This is normally ON
(normally closed).
Note 2: Internal thermal fuse prevents abnormal heat generation which may occur
due to misoperation. (Unrecoverable)
Note 3: When the thermal relay has been activated, stop the robot driver or increase
the deceleration time to reduce the regenerative energy.
10-4
10. Appendix
10.2 Recommended peripheral devices

This section describes the recommended optional devices for the RD series robot drivers.
All optional devices introduced here are manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment
Systems Co., Ltd.
(1) Input side AC reactor (for harmonic suppression, power coordination, power factor
improvement)
■ Model No.
A L I– 2 . 5 L
Capacity (See the table below for interrelation with robot driver.)
Input side AC reactor
■ Connection diagram ■ Dimension drawing

Reactor Robot driver 6-M K
Amax. Dmax. Emax.
R0 R Robot
L1 U
Power S0 S
L2
supply V M
T0 T L3
Hmax.
W
X Y
Cmax.
4-φJ
10
Robot Input side Dimensions (mm)
Appendix
Mass
driver AC reactor J K
A C D E H X Y (kg)
model No. model No.
RD*-05
RD*-10
ALI-2.5L 130 82 60 40 150 50 67 6 4 2.4
RD*-20
RDP-25
10-5
10. Appendix
(2) DC reactor (for harmonic suppression, power coordination, power factor improvement)
■ Model No. ■ Connection diagram
DCL-L-0.2 PD P DC reactor
Capacity
(See the table below for
interrelation with robot driver.) (+)1 (+)
U Robot
L1
Power L2 V M
supply
L3 W
Robot driver
■ Dimensions (mm)
Y±1
D
X±1
W 4-C
2-K Bmax.
10
Hmax.
Appendix
Caution label
Robot driver DC reactor Dimensions (mm) Mass

model No. model No. W D H B X Y C K (kg)
RD*-05 DCL-L-0.2 66 90 98 85 56 72 5.2×8 M4 0.8

RD*-10 DCL-L-0.4 66 90 98 95 56 72 5.2×8 M4 1.0
RD*-20 DCL-L-0.7 66 90 98 105 56 72 5.2×8 M4 1.3
RDP-25 DCL-L-1.5 66 90 98 115 56 72 5.2×8 M4 1.6
10-6
10. Appendix
(3) Input side noise filter
■ Model No. ■ Connection diagram (3-phase product)

NF-L 6 Noise filter Robot driver
L1 L1’ L1 U Robot
Rated current of noise filter
Power L2 L2’ L2 V M
Series name (NF series) supply L3 L3’ L3 W
■ Dimensions (mm)
66±3
52±1
(10)
Robot drive side

L3’L2’L1’
100±1
117±2
(84)
Product
label
L3 L2 L1
Power supply side
2-φ5.0 10 M4
67MAX
(15)
10
■ Specifications
Appendix
Robot driver Noise filter Mass
Rated voltage Rated current
model No. model No. (kg)
RD*-05
RD*-10
NF-L6 250V AC 6A 0.5
RD*-20
RDP-25
10-7
10. Appendix
(4) Input side noise filter (EMC compliance)
■ Model No ■ Connection diagram (3-phase filter)
NF – CEH 7 Noise filter Robot driver

Robot
Rated current of noise filter L1 L1’ L1 U
Power L2 L2’ L2 V M
EMC compliance supply L3 L3’ L3 W
Series name (NF series)
■ Dimensions (mm)
74±3
56±2
5
Robot drive side

L3’L2’L1’
130±2
144±2
(95)
Product
label
L3 L2 L1
Power supply side
φ5 11 M4
73±3
(15)
10
■ Specifications
Appendix
Robot driver Noise filter Mass

Rated voltage Rated current
model No. model No. (kg)
RD*-05
RD*-10
NF-CEH7 480V AC 7A 0.7
RD*-20
RDP-25
10-8
10. Appendix
(5) Radio noise filter (zero-phase reactor)

■ Connection diagram
Radio noise
filter Robot
R L1 U
Power S Robot
L2 V M
supply driver
T L3 W
Should be as Note 1: Wind 3-phase wires L1,

close as possible L2 and L3 in the same direction.
to robot driver. Note 2: This filter can be used
on both input and
output sides of robot driver.
■ Dimensions (mm)
ZCL–A ZCL–B40
7×14
32
Cable
78max.
F7 39.5min through-hole
72±0.5
129 mounting hole

Cable 3-M4
through-hole 85
35
83
26
7±0.5
95 max max
80±0.5
2-F5.5 (M5)
12.5±0.3 10
3
160
180
Appendix
ZCL–B75
Cable
through-hole
112
75
161 MAX
140±0.5
R3.5±0.3 7±0.5
32
10-9
10. Appendix
(6) Input-side radio noise filter (capacitor filter)

Connect this filter directly to the power terminals on the robot driver to reduce
radiation noise emitted from the cable.
■ Dimensions (mm) ■ Connection diagram

Robot driver
Robot
L1 U
Power L2 V M
supply L3 W
Capacitor filter
Model No. W H T
CFI-L
48.0 35.0 26.0
(250V rating)
10
Appendix
10-10
Single-phase/ B2 B1
3-phase 200 V TM2
RB RBR
(Not provided Power amplifier (inverter)
for 100W and
(+) Power rectifier (rectifier circuit) 200W type)
Regenerative
braking resistor
(option)
(+)1 U
84
CHARGE V M
L1
W
L2 Regenerate
braking circuit
L3
Note 1)
(–)
L1C TM2
DB circuit
supply
L2C Protective circuit Gate driver
Control power
I/O Pulse train
Position command Position Speed Current PWM
control control control Sensor
Sensor output
Monitor A/D
Current
Origin sensor signal A/D
processing
I/O
I/O interface ENC
(Bit input/output) Servo ON (bit input/output) Position sensor R/D
etc.
signal
10.3 Internal block diagram of robot driver
converter
Operator processing
PC RS232C Servo sequence control
(TOP for Windows)
(serial communication) Auto tuning, etc.
PC
Data processing, etc.
Robot driver
Note 1: For 750W to 1.5kW type
At 750W or more, a thyristor is used as relay 84.
10. Appendix
10-11
Appendix
10
Revision record
Manual version Issue date Description

Ver. 2.00 Dec. 2009 Addition of RDP-25 and applicable robot type. Addition and
correction of reference graph for setting the position control
cut-off frequency. Modification in "5.17 Magnetic pole position
estimation action". The address and other information were
added to the front cover.
Ver. 2.01 Mar. 2010 Addition of parameter (Fd-44) and modification in other
parameters in accordance with the addition.
Ver. 2.02 Aug. 2010 Addition of reference graph for setting the acceleration and
position control cut-off frequency in accordance with addition
of applicable robot (MF7). Modification of serial number label.
Addition of "4.3 Emergency stop", etc.
Ver. 2.03 Jan. 2011 The description regarding "Warranty" was changed, etc.
Ver. 2.04 May 2011 Correction of reference graph for setting the acceleration and
position control cut-off frequency. Clerical error corrections.
User's Manual
Robot Driver
RD series
May 2011
Ver. 2.04
This manual is based on Ver. 2.04 of Japanese manual.
© YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

IM Operations
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in
any form without the permission of YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
Information furnished by YAMAHA in this manual is believed to be
reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for possible
inaccuracies or omissions. If you find any part unclear in this manual,
please contact YAMAHA or YAMAHA sales representatives.

Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series: User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YAMAHA SINGLE-AXIS ROBOT DRIVER

YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.

About this manual

Chapter 1 Safety precautions

Chapter 2 Before using the unit

Chapter 3 Installation and wiring

Chapter 6 Parameter description

6.4 Control block diagram and monitors 6-84

Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 8 Specifications and Dimensions

1.1 Precautions for use 1-1

Symbols used to indicate a prohibited or mandatory action are explained below.

: Indicates a mandatory action. For example, indicates "Must be electrically

1.1 Precautions for use

1.3 Carr ying

2. ALWAYS FIRST INSTALL THE UNIT BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.

1.6 Control and operation

1.7 Maintenance and inspection

2.1 Inspection after unpacking 2-1

2.1 Inspection after unpacking

2.1.1 Checking the product

Before using the unit

Specification label position

Robot driver model name

Details on specification label

2 Robot driver model No.

X05 RDX-05 Y December

Details on serial number label

2.1.2 User's manual

2.2 Product inquiries and warranty

2.2.1 Notes when making an inquir y

Before using the unit

2.3 External view and part names

2.4 Robot driver and robot combination

Before using the unit

3.1 Installation 3-1

Installation and wiring

3.1.1 Precautions during installation

Air flow Provide enough space so that upper/lower

(3) Ambient temperature precautions

(5) Installation environment precautions

(6) Installation method and direction precautions

(7) Precautions when housing robot drivers in a box

Installation and wiring

100mm or more 40mm or 10mm or 10mm or 10mm or 40mm or

3 3. MAKE SURE THE POWER IS OFF BEFORE CARRYING OUT WIRING.

3.2.1 Terminal block and connectors

Main circuit terminal block

Input/output signal connector (I/O)

Position sensor connector (ENC)

3.2.2 Main circuit wiring

Regenerative braking resistor

Installation and wiring

I/O PC for parameter setting

(2) Terminal assignment

V Motor power cable connection terminal

Ground Ground connection terminal M4 –

(3) Wiring precautions